JP2016047296A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that allows a player to enjoy a game even in start of the game by suppressing an excessive act of ascertaining an excellent machine in the start of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game start determination means of determining whether a game in the game machine is a game in game start within a fixed period from start of the game; and an attention target change performance execution means of using a display screen to distract player's attention from a start pocket, and to execute a performance for attracting the player's attention to the display screen when it is determined that the game in the game machine is a game in the game start.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 167

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly suitable for application to a ball-type gaming machine that produces an effect using a display screen at the start of gaming.

  Generally, a player plays a game while judging whether or not the gaming machine is an excellent table, particularly at the start of the game. When deciding whether or not it is an excellent table, for example, out of the number of rented game balls, if the number of game balls that entered the starting port is more than a certain number, it is determined as an excellent table, and if it is less than a certain number Judged as not being an excellent platform. If the player determines that the gaming machine is a good platform, the player continues to play with the gaming machine as it is, and if the player determines that the gaming machine is not a good platform, the player will somehow increase the number of game balls by moving to another platform. Stand around to let you.

  Here, as described above, at the start of the game, the player spends his nerves in determining whether or not the game is an excellent table, rather than enjoying the game. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot truly use the game ball that has been paid and lent for the game and cannot spend the game ball for fun.

  In response to the problem of not being able to truly enjoy the game at the start of the game, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a technique for improving the stage effect that hints at the possibility of a big hit by devising the stage image at the start of the game or in the demonstration display, A gaming machine that enhances the interest of a player is disclosed.

JP 2003-190523 A

  However, in the case of the gaming machine of this Patent Document 1, no matter how much an effect that is devised at the start of the game, the player will also make the effect performed here as a judgment material for determining a good stand, after all, Rather than enjoying the production, it results in spending nerves to determine the excellent stand by the production performed at the start of the game.

  And by producing a sophisticated idea at the start of the game, the player will perform the determination by this effect and the determination by the number of game balls that have entered the start opening in parallel, at the start of the game You can't afford to enjoy more and more games. Therefore, the player always plays the game with an unstable feeling at the start of the game, and cannot truly enjoy the game at the start of the game.

  Therefore, the problem of the present invention is to suppress excessive act of discriminating the excellent platform at the start of the game and stabilize the unstable feeling at the start of the game, thereby enjoying the game even at the start of the game. It is to provide a game machine that can be used.

In order to solve this problem, in the present invention,
A game ball is launched into a game area including a plurality of obstacle nails, a gate, a start opening, a big prize opening, and a display screen, and the fired game ball collides with the plurality of obstacle nails to roll and When passing through the gate in the process of flowing down or entering the starting port, an internal lottery of a normal symbol or an internal lottery of a special symbol is performed, while an internal lottery of the normal symbol or the special symbol of the special symbol In the case where an internal lottery is performed, in the gaming machine that performs the display while variably displaying decorative symbols using the display screen,
As a result of the internal symbol lottery, if the winning symbol is won, the movable piece of the ordinary electric accessory provided in advance in the game area is opened and closed so that the game ball enters the start opening. Support game execution means for executing a game that facilitates,
As a result of the internal lottery of the special symbol, when the big win symbol is won, the opening / closing member of the special electric accessory provided in advance in the game area is opened / closed so that the game ball enters the big prize opening. Jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that makes it easy to play a ball;
A game start determination means for determining whether or not the game in the gaming machine is a game at the start of a game within a certain period after the game is started;
If it is determined by the game start time determination means that the game in the gaming machine is a game at the start of the game, the player's attention is diverted from the start port using the display screen and at the same time the player's attention And a target object changing effect executing means for executing an effect of attracting the user to the display screen.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enjoy a game even at the start of the game by suppressing an act of identifying an excessively good platform at the start of the game and stabilizing an unstable feeling at the start of the game.

It is a perspective view of the state where the outer frame, main body frame, and door frame of the pachinko machine were opened. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view of the attachment / detachment structure of a main body frame and an outer frame. It is an exploded view of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. It is a back view of the upper metal fitting part which shows a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a side speaker and a side speaker cover. It is a disassembled perspective view of a side speaker and a side speaker cover. It is a perspective view of the front (A) and back (B) of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member from the back. It is an expansion perspective view of the wiring part between a door frame and a main body frame. It is a perspective view of the front (A) and back (B) of a right side decoration unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is the front (A) and back (B) perspective view of a left side decoration unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view of the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front view of the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which removed the rear case of the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a payout path, a payout motor, and a payout rotary body. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a figure which shows a ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit and a foul cover unit. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of a power supply board box. It is sectional drawing (A) and an exploded perspective view (B) of a terminal board box. It is the front view (A) and sectional drawing (B) of a launch power supply board box. It is the front perspective view (A) and back perspective view (B) of a back cover. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the front view (A) and perspective view (B) of a locking device. It is a perspective view (A)-(C) of a locking device. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view of the game board where the door frame was removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. It is an enlarged front view (A) and (B) of a function display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board using the game panel of other embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the game panel in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view, such as a game panel. It is a front view of a winning device unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning apparatus unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning apparatus unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize-winning apparatus unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view of the base member in a winning device unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the mechanism part in a prize apparatus unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view of the mechanism part of a winning device unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the opening-and-closing drive mechanism of the 2nd starting opening. It is a disassembled perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism of a 1st opening / closing prize winning device. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the opening-and-closing drive mechanism to the vertical direction, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a cross-sectional perspective view which shows the operation state of an opening / closing drive mechanism. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd opening / closing prize-winning apparatus and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the 2nd opening and closing prize apparatus from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side decoration unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center object and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view of the structural member of a center accessory. It is an enlarged front view of a game board upper left part (a) and a left center part (b). It is AA and BB cross-sectional perspective view (a) of FIG. 132, and (b). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the relationship between a base frame member and a game panel. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view of the structural member of a back unit. It is a perspective view of the upper side accessory unit in a back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of an upper accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a large unit part. It is a disassembled perspective view of the rotation unit in a large unit part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a large side light emission rotation part and a small side light emission rotation part. It is the cross-sectional perspective view (a) and perspective view (b) of a small side light emission rotation part. It is the perspective view which looked at the small side light emission rotation part and its drive part from diagonally back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the rotation decoration body in a small unit part. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the rotary body decoration body longitudinally and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view of the enclosure unit of a small unit part. It is a perspective view of the left side accessory unit in a back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a left side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a left side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a left side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the movable decoration body in a left side accessory unit. It is a perspective view of the right side accessory unit in a back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a right side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right side accessory unit. It is a perspective view of the movable decoration body in a right side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view of the movable part main body in a movable decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view of the movable arm part in a movable decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view of the drive mechanism in a right side accessory unit. It is a cross-sectional view (b) of the perspective views (a) and (a) of the center accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the logo display unit from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the logo display unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view of the shelf back decoration unit in a back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the other structure in a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the display unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the left side accessory unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the right side accessory unit in a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 169. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit etc. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart in the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a liquid crystal control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detailed structure of VDP and an image division | segmentation module. It is explanatory drawing of a 1st synchronizing signal. It is a schematic diagram showing one mode of image (data) division. It is a timing chart which shows processing by image (data) division. It is a timing chart which shows the outline | summary of a process in the case of displaying an image only in one panel (for example, 1st panel) of two panels. It is a timing chart which shows the outline | summary of the switching process from the state which displays the image on two panels to the state in which only the 1st panel displays an image. It is a timing chart which shows the outline | summary of the switching process from the state which displays the image on two panels to the state which only a 2nd panel displays an image. It is the schematic which shows another aspect of the division | segmentation of an image (data). It is another timing chart of image (data) division. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st synchronizing signal and the 2nd synchronizing signal when using the display panel from which image size (screen size) mutually differs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is a table block diagram in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a block diagram which shows the structural examples, such as a scheduler control part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a functional block diagram regarding the first big hit lottery on the main control board. It is a functional block diagram regarding the second big hit lottery on the main control board. It is a functional block diagram regarding the advantageous game state which occurs according to the lottery result in the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery. It is a functional block diagram regarding the normal lottery on the main control board. It is a functional block diagram regarding the production on the peripheral control board. It is a conceptual diagram which shows a decoration symbol arrangement | sequence table. It is a conceptual diagram which shows a decoration symbol role table. It is a front view at the time of the change display of a decoration design. It is a perspective view at the time of the change display of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of an identification display process. It is a screen block diagram when the transition conditions of a specific game are satisfied. It is a screen block diagram which notifies the transfer of a specific game. It is the initial screen block diagram which shifted to the specific game. It is a screen block diagram when a gauge increases after shifting to a specific game. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a specific game transfer process. It is a screen block diagram at the time of a specific mode transfer. It is a screen block diagram at the time of mission notification in a specific mode. It is an initial screen configuration diagram in a specific mode. It is a screen block diagram at the time of button press in specific mode. It is a screen block diagram at the time of mission failure in a specific mode. It is a screen block diagram at the time of mission success in a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a specific mode transfer process. It is a screen block diagram at the time of a specific production transition. It is a screen block diagram at the time of a specific effect transfer decision. It is a screen block diagram at the time of specific production. It is a screen block diagram at the time of specific production continuation determination. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a specific effect transfer process. It is a screen block diagram at the time of a specific mode transfer. It is a screen block diagram at the time of a specific mode transfer. It is a screen block diagram at the time of production in specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a specific mode transfer process. It is a top view which shows the example of a display effect accompanying the action | operation of a right side accessory unit. It is a top view which shows the example of a display effect accompanying the action | operation of a right side accessory unit. It is a top view which shows the example of a display effect accompanying the action | operation of a right side accessory unit. It is a top view which shows the example of a display effect accompanying the action | operation of a right side accessory unit. It is a conceptual diagram of a screen cracking production. It is a screen block diagram of a simultaneous change screen. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a simultaneous change display process. It is a flowchart which shows the other process sequence of simultaneous fluctuation display processing. It is a conceptual diagram of the display screen displayed on a center visual field and a peripheral visual field. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of effect effect amplification processing. It is a conceptual diagram which shows a player gaze image. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a profit gap correction process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of the process at the time of a game start. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a development request achievement process.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend toward the center of the tip from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b, and the left side frame depending on the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of the present example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are arranged apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction inside and attached to the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 below the lower end. A pair of side speaker covers 290 that are disposed and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 30 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view shown.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and the lower left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110, and a handle device attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 in front view. Is further provided with a cover member 134 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. Can be done.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base main body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths of the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24, and 24) for attaching the side speaker cover 290. Are formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right ones are arranged so as to pass through the glass unit support stepped portions 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Accordingly, it is possible to take time for removing the side speaker cover 290 to allow a person who performs an illegal act to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. The removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (safety) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by deceiving theft acts on the side speakers 130 and the fraudulent acts on the game area 1100 etc. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electric equipment and the door side electric equipment can be prevented. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, a ball rental unit 360, a handle device as a device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 27), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 that is bent forward to the right side (open side) portion of the upper long side edge when viewed from the front. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208; a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side; and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 It has.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A substrate 214 and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially vertical center of the side inner lens 212 on the lower side and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224; an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202; and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208 from the inside. Yes. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decoration board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surface of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated with light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame The inner frame 2 is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a partition wall frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition frames 202f, and each of the divided frames is divided. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a line.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 so that it appears as if a jewel has been fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide unit 206a can be shined as a gemstone.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is provided with a mounting step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this portion can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. Further, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 210a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a. And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state in which the front surface is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted. It cannot be recognized. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) to have a brilliant appearance and make the sense of perspective unclear.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side lens 210) is used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). Note that the LED 214c of the upper decorative substrate 214 on the right side that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position and in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper end back side of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250 It has.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. And a left side under the decorative board cover 260 that.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame A lower end frame 242d for connecting the lower end edges of 242a, and the inner frame 2 arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 that is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. In addition, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 to be described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition wall frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244 and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude is provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is provided with a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in a front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. A peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. The side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to exhibit a distinctive appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. A plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubled and refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) to have a sparkling appearance and make the perspective feel unclear.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) is used. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. And the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the front speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Accordingly, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front surface decorative member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decorative members 281; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a in an arc shape in which the central upper end is a side extending left and right, the central lower end is a vertex, and each side is loose in front view. And has three protrusions extending from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the apex of the lower side into the central opening 281a. The front decorative member 281 has a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by the streaks. A side opening 281b is formed so as to extend along the streaking as well as the shape of the blade extending.

  The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward. Are formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing in different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

  The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

  Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286, penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker frame 266 near the upper end frame 202c, 242c is substantially the same as the end shape of the upper speaker cover 226, 266 closer to the upper end frame 202c, 242c. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like. It is arranged between.

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the dish unit 300 that is disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 of this example is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position 110, the door frame base body 100 is fixed to the door frame base body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base body 110.

  Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screws attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. The side speaker 130 can be removed by removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the speaker can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door that closes the front surface of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the body member 292 from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base body 110, the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110. The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even when a player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily removed. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speakers 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged, so that the player becomes irritated and less interested and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is not affected even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291. Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  Moreover, since the side speaker cover 290 which covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound production enjoyable.

  Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected without a sense of incongruity, and the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by the side speaker cover 290 and attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5. It takes a little time to remove the glass, and it is possible to make the removal work troublesome for those who are trying to perform illegal acts, etc., and to make the removal work stand out by removing the relatively large glass unit 590 The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence power (safety) against fraudulent acts etc. can be made by deceiving theft or fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward, and the front end of the upper plate body 312 covers the upper outer periphery. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction A plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guide portions 318a which are disposed between the plate upper decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and are fitted into the openings 316a of the plate upper decoration member 316 are provided. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a on the upper surface. Are mounted between the upper plate upper decorative panel 320 and the upper plate upper decorative panel 314 and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and covers the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 328, a dish side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the dish side middle cover 330 A dish-side middle cover lens 332 fitted from the side, and a dish-side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is formed with a lock hole 330b at a right end portion thereof to face a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; see FIG. 171).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side surface and allowing a game ball to pass therethrough.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

  Although not described in detail, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower positions at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening or notch that penetrates in the direction is formed, and an opening through which a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. And the upper plate upper lens 318 can be held between the upper plate upper panel 314 by being attached to the decorative attachment portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper plate upper lens 318, and an upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and an upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are disposed. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper dish upper lens 318 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance as if a pair-shaped gemstone was fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is linearly formed, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330 c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330 c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 when viewed from the front. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. And an operation piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 and moved upward and downward by the vertical movement of the operation piece 342, and a ball feed unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 is provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 and lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is biased by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. Can be done.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward and are opened and closed by sliding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 backward. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. There is a spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support substrate 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support tube 416b and the inner tube portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the upper surface corresponding to the ring of the dial operation portion 401. Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405; It has.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward / reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from the upper side; A pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432 is provided.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (press operation unit) 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached thereto. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300 and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw with the front cover 428 removed, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed and the impacts can be prevented from being concentrated. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, thereby enabling the dial operation unit It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is apparently adjusted to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. Can withstand high loads , It is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player can be detected, it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation And a front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 that is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that can be rotated by being engaged with 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the rotation position detection sensor 512. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a sensor support A single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body rear 504 that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 are initially rotated ( And a handle return spring 522 that urges the actuator to return to a counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a hemispherical round shape that expands to the front side on the front end side, and a cylindrical shape with the rear end open on the rear end side. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through a slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508 so that the rotation range of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the rotary handle main body front 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are biased to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate, the rotation drive of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frames 5 are linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration relating to the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. And the occurrence of defects in the joint unit can be eliminated, and the player's interest is reduced due to game ball driving defects. And it is capable to prevent the.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, and a second A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is rotated to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. It is possible to remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and also provides the player with a dish unit. Notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. A ball-extracting member 583 having a and a game ball on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feed member 584 that is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis, and a ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance and suppress the interest, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301, so that the game The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are Directional movement can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a that are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate that extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the gaming window 101 having a vertically long elliptical shape, For driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is disposed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. Appearance with continuous integration.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. In addition, light emission decoration can be performed with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 that are arranged, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same emission mode (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination pattern can be made substantially uniform. If it is, it can be set as the light emission decoration which was interrupted in the circumferential direction. It can be made into a light-emitting decoration, and can attract a player's interest strongly.

  In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die-casting, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since the operation unit mounting portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed to bend and the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424 can alleviate the impact on the dial operation unit 401, the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, and can prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced, It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by side decorative frames 202 and 242 that are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend as far as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surfaces thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this example, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decorations). Normal luminance lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). In addition, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a blue-tinged transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a white (milky white) member having translucency. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface, and can diffuse and refract light, so that the light passes through the transparent central lens 282. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative board 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, and the rear lenses 284 and the lower lens 289. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively) on the left and right sides. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. In the same way as the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling brightness to guide it. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are set as the upper right side group 105. The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to decorate the light emission in a V shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three by three from the right side when viewed from the front. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit full color, and 3 in actual light emission control. It has doubled 84 systems. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to 8 systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing and the like are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  In addition, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are provided. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to provide a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as a light emission effect, or light moving toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, or light from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  Further, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed. Further, the upper center side group 105 emits light so that the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player has an opportunity and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable game) State, short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state when probability change, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or a light-emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are the first close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) are arranged. The pachinko machine can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle shape, and the light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can produce a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly. 1 can be set.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric circle, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emission decoration can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emitting decoration can be obtained.

  Furthermore, LEDs 214b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a plurality of annular shapes by causing the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light according to the gaming state. And I have never seen it on a pachinko machine so far It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 constituted by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). So that the light converges toward the gaming window 101, that is, the gaming area 1100 by emitting light in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 from the outside to the inside. And can make the player's interest to the gaming area 1100, and can make it seem that there is something good in the gaming area 1100, which increases the expectation of the game. It can suppress that interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good for the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 that are radially arranged so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that extend in the circumferential direction in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by causing these radial groups 104 to emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The player's interest can be strongly attracted by changes in the light-emitting decoration. Further, the radial groups 104 arranged in a radial direction cause the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the circumferential direction. Since the LEDs 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are divided, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each of the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction, and it is possible to obtain a pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of by providing more various light emission effects.

  Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed, so that Even when the lighting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b, the annularly arranged LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a and the radially arranged LEDs 214b and 216b are arranged. , 254b, and 256b in the same light emission mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is integrated Thus, the light emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially on one peripheral lens portion 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light even if the appearance looks like one. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission decoration substantially concentrically, so that it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased, and the light emission Increase the impact of decoration and attract players' attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, the side inner lenses 212, 250 irradiate the side lenses 210, 250 by diffusing light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. 252 is provided, so that unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be suppressed, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape, so that a light emitting body that emits light in a linear shape (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) As compared with the case where the LED is used, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are individually made to emit light, thereby allowing the first annular group 1 to emit light. 2 and the second annular group 103 can also change the light emission in the circumferential direction, can present more various light emission effects, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to difficulty in getting bored. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by random refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 placed on the board can be hard to see, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side and prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Can do.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, so that the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, sufficient space between the side lenses 210 and 250 is sufficient. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, so that the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the radiating lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible that the light from the portions 210b and 250b or the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b affects the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and the light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the light emission.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit And a unit 790.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock engagement holes 621 are engaged with and engaged with engagement protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000, and the front end frame portion 602 is engaged. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The award ball passage cover 780 in the award ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a when viewed from the back. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branch unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed explanation is omitted on the prize ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 And a mounting portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude further downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and can be brought into contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and communicates with a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b and bends substantially in a letter shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. ing.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 is provided.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. At the top of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attaching / detaching button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and relay board mounting The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and generates heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 engaged with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It can be discharged to the outside outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 at 800.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens at the right end of the view, and a full passage 775 that guides the game ball from the position away from the right side of the back view of the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side (see FIG. 79). ) And, and a full sphere outlet 776 a game ball that has flowed through the full passage 775 opened in the front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 is discharged forwardly.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 that is opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring latching portion 793e for latching.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-down direction in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box 860 includes a terminal board box 840 that is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 that are attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. ing.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830.

  The substrate unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a heavy bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface communicating the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launching power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being cheated on the fired power supply substrate 831 and also having a high defense against fraud.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down to the bottom and the game ball that is discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. A wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to turn (turn back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 168) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connecting terminal plate cover 873 is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 after the fixing piece 873h is inserted, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so that it can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. That.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal 8 on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming etc. 4a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection cutout portion 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated through the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared with engagement by a simple claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 106). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front side right side (open side) side of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side protrudes from the side surface 1001b contacting the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall part 605 side, the front locking structure is connected to the peripheral wall part 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b in contact therewith.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a clearance side hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034 I have.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted through a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 above and below the cylinder lock penetration hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper frame 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side of the tank frame unit 740 and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 or the award ball device 740. Since the transparent back cover 900 is arranged substantially in the same plane as the surface, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A pachinko machine that can visually recognize the rear side and the rear side surface and can easily check (visually check) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4 Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, it passes through the slit 916 or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 114).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (or has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning concave portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 is viewed from the front side. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through-hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a corresponding range, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear surface in the rear surface, and a fixing portion. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 includes a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with the rear side opened, and a thin horizontal box shape with the front side opened to cover the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece protruding rearward and elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. And a rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2107 by the game balls that are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 made up of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2107 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to be arranged, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, the big prize opening And a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of 2153 open / close patterns.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2107. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  In addition, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2107 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  The function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 168). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has functions as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. As compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001b (see FIG. 164, etc.) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in the back box 3001. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234 is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is depressed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and whose lower end side is opened downward. A notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in a front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. When an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 for housing the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them outside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally left front, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left rear, FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines and forms the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which game balls are to be driven. A gaming panel 1200 arranged to close the gaming area 1100 on the rear side of the front component member 1110, and an upper side of the out port 1151 at a substantially horizontal center in the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. Arranged at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100, a supported winning apparatus unit 2100, a side decoration unit 2300 disposed along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 on the left side of the winning apparatus unit 2100 and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. A frame-shaped center accessory 2400 supported by the gaming panel 1200 and the gaming panel 1200 A liquid crystal display device 1900 as an effect display means that is attached to the back unit 3000 and the player panel through the frame of the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image and notification information. And mainly. Here, the game panel 1200 corresponds to the game board of the present invention, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponds to the effect display means of the present invention. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 1200 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Winning equipment unit]
First, the winning device unit 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming panel and the members attached thereto, as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 115 is a front view of the winning device unit, and FIG. 116 is an oblique view of the winning device unit. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the winning device unit as viewed obliquely from behind, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the winning device unit as viewed from obliquely before, FIG. FIG. 120 is a front view of the base member in the winning device unit, FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the mechanism portion in the winning device unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 121 is the main configuration of the mechanism portion of the winning device unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of each member as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the second start-up opening / closing drive mechanism as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. Opening and closing drive for opening and closing prize winning device FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism as viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 124 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism as viewed from the diagonally front direction. FIG. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the second opening / closing prize winning device disassembled and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the lower portion of the second opening / closing prize winning device from an oblique front. It is a perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the winning device unit 2100 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1200 e formed at the lower portion in the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1200, and then the gaming panel 1200. It is fixed on the front. This winning device unit 2100 includes a plurality of receiving ports (winning ports) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. As the plurality of receiving ports, a first start port 2101 disposed substantially in the center in the left-right direction, a second start port 2102 disposed on the right side of the first start port 2101, and a position directly below the first start port 2101 The first opening / closing prize winning device 2103, the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 arranged immediately below the second starting port 2102, and the left side of the first starting port 2101 and the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 are arranged side by side in a stepped manner. There are three general winning ports 2105, a general winning port 2106 disposed right above the second start port 2102, and a gate portion 2107 disposed on the right side of the general winning port 2106. Since the general winning opening 2106 is arranged at the upper part of the second starting opening 2102 as described above, it can contribute to stabilizing the supply of the payout to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, the winning device unit 2100 includes a base member 2110 fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. A first open / close winning device 2103, a second open / close winning device 2104, general winning ports 2105 and 2106, and a gate portion 2107 are provided. As shown in FIG. 118, a light-transmissive main lens portion 2112 and a right lens portion 2113 are disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110, and a cover member 2114 is disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112. It is installed.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the base member 2110 has a thin plate-like plate-like portion 2111 disposed along the front surface of the game panel 1200. The plate-like portion 2111 includes a first start port 2101, The general winning ports 2105 and 2106 and the gate portion 2107 are integrally formed. The first starting port 2101 and the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 have a box-like shape that protrudes to the front game area 1100 (see FIG. 109) and has an open upper surface, and can always accept game balls. It has become. The first start port 2101 and the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 have rear end portions extending beyond the plate-like portion 2111 to guide the winning game balls. The gate portion 2107 has a gate-like shape through which a game ball can always pass, and an arc-shaped guide portion 2110h that guides the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2107 downward and diagonally to the left is provided at the lower right side of the gate portion 2107. It is molded integrally with the portion 2107.

  The base member 2110 has a plurality of openings that penetrate the plate-like portion 2111 in the front-rear direction. Specifically, a first opening 2110a that is positioned below the general winning opening 2106 and through which a game ball that has won the second starting opening 2102 passes, and a first opening / closing winning apparatus 2103 that is positioned below the first starting opening 2101. A second opening 2110b through which a game ball that has won a prize passes, and a horizontally-long rectangular third opening that is located below the first opening 2110a and communicates with a large winning opening 2153 (described later) of the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 2110c, and a fourth opening 2110e through which the obstacle nail K (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 115) located between the gate 2107 and the third opening 2110c and planted in the game panel 1200 is inserted. Is formed. The plate-like portion 2111 has a reflection surface formed on the entire surface by plating, but the light irradiated through the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110. Has a plurality of windows so as to be projected to the player side. Specifically, a plurality of polygonal large window portions 2110f having a relatively large opening area and a plurality of circular small window portions 2110g having an opening area smaller than that of the large window portion 2110f are formed.

  Further, in the plate-like portion 2111, a notch 2110d is formed between a portion where the first start port 2101 and the second opening 2110b are formed and a portion where the first opening 2110a and the third opening 2110c are formed. The obstacle nail K (see FIG. 115) implanted in the game panel 1200 is inserted through the notch 2110d. In addition, on the front surface of the plate-like portion 2111 between the second opening portion 2110b and the third opening portion 2110c, a dividing line 2011i made of a vertical groove is provided so as to divide the gaming area 1100 into the left and right.

  As shown in FIG. 118, a front decoration 2121 with a seal member 2120 attached is attached to the front surface of the first start port 2101, and a seal member 2170 is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2105. A front decoration 2171 is attached, and a seal member 2170 is attached to the front face of the general winning opening 2106. In addition, the gate unit 2107 is provided with a gate sensor 2176 that detects a passing game ball.

  The second start port 2102 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second start port 2102 is disposed below the general winning port 2106, and a game ball can enter through the first opening 2110a (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It has become. The second starting port 2102 includes a pair of blades 2125 that can be expanded with the general winning port 2106. In a state where the pair of blades 2125 rise substantially vertically (the state shown in FIG. 115), The game ball cannot be received into the second starting port 2102 by the winning opening 2106 and the pair of blades 2125, whereas the second blade 2125 is expanded in the left-right direction by the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 described later. A game ball can be received at the start port 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of blades 2125. The pair of blades 2125 are opened and closed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2176 (see FIG. 118). In addition, as shown in FIG. 118, the pair of blades 2125 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first opening 2110a (see FIG. 119) formed in the plate-like portion 2111, and the front entrance is closed. The lower side is covered with 2124, and the game ball won in the second start port 2102 is guided by the ball entrance 2124 and sent to the first opening 2110a. A through-hole 2125a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the lower end portion of the blade 2125, and a rotating shaft portion 2124a provided in the ball-entry portion 2124 is connected to the plate-like portion 2111 through the through-hole 2125a. Is supported so as to be rotatable about the rotating shaft 2124a.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the blade 2125 is disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110, and as shown in FIGS. And a link member 2130 that is connected to the plunger 2129 of the solenoid 2128 and converts the movement of the plunger 2129 in the front-rear direction into the rotation (opening and closing) movement of the pair of blades 2125. . The link member 2130 protrudes from both the left and right sides and is formed to extend from the left and right sides of the upper surface to a pair of rotating shaft portions 2130a that are fitted from the inside into bearing holes 2127b provided on the left and right sides of the holder 2127. A pair of locking portions 2130b to be locked to the plunger 2129, and formed on both the left and right sides, arcuate, and engageable with an eccentric claw 2125b protruding rearward from the rear surface of the blade 2125 (see FIG. 118) A pair of engaging portions 2130c. That is, when the plunger 2129 is retracted by energizing the solenoid 2128, the link member 2130 is rotated so that the engaging portion 2130c is lifted around the rotation shaft portion 2130a, so that the pair of blades 2125 are in a vertical state (game balls cannot be received) The state is changed from a state in which the game ball is expanded (a state in which a game ball can be received).

  Next, the first open / close winning device 2103 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 is disposed below the first start port 2101 and allows a game ball to enter through the second opening 2110b (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIG. 118, the first open / close winning device 2103 has a ball-entry portion 2135 that protrudes from the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110 to the front game area 1100 and through which a game ball can pass, and a rear side of the base member 2110. An opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 that allows a game ball that is disposed and passed through the ball-entry portion 2135 to be received by the second opening 2110b, and a winning sensor 2137 that detects the received game ball (see FIG. 123). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the entrance part 2135 is formed in a gate shape through which a game ball can pass in the up and down direction, and a game ball that rolls in the game area 1100 is placed on the upper surface on both the left and right sides. A pair of guide portions 2135a for guiding into 2135 is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 includes a front base member 2139 and a rear base member 2140, a solenoid 2141 disposed in the rear base member 2140, a tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142, and a link And a member 2144. The front base member 2139 has a support hole 2139a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and supports the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the front end of the support hole 2139a is the second opening 2110b (FIG. 119). To the rear surface of the plate-like portion 2111. The rear base member 2140 is connected to the rear side of the front base member 2139, and includes a housing portion 2140a communicating with the support hole 2139a and a support portion 2140e that slidably supports the rear side of the bellows-shaped protruding and recessed piece 2142. I have. In addition, a lower part of the rear base member 2140 has a sensor attachment part 2140b into which the winning sensor 2137 is inserted from the front. A circular notch 2140d is formed. In addition, a notch-shaped bearing portion 2140c whose front surface is open is formed on the left and right walls of the rear base member 2140.

  The solenoid 2141 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2140a of the rear base member 2140 with the plunger 2143 facing forward. The tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 includes a rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 2142a that is elongated in the front-rear direction, a ball receiving portion 2142b that is formed at the tip portion of the frame portion 2142a and has a downward slope toward the rear, and a frame The rear guide part 2142c formed on the rear side of the part 2142a and slidably supported by the support part 2140e of the rear base member 2140, and disposed between the frame part 2142a and the rear guide part 2142c from the left and right sides. And a pair of groove portions 2142d formed in a groove shape. The link member 2144 is connected to the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141 and converts the movement of the plunger 2143 in the front-rear direction into the linear movement of the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142. A pair of rotating shaft portions 2144a that are fitted and inserted into the bearing portion 2140c provided on the base member 2140 from the front side, and a pair that is formed to extend inward from the left and right sides of the upper surface and that is locked to the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141. The locking part 2144b and the latching part 2144c which protrudes inward from the right and left both sides of a lower end, and are latched by a pair of groove part 2142d in the bell-shaped intrusion piece 2142 are provided. That is, when the plunger 2143 is retracted by energizing the solenoid 2141, the link member 2144 rotates around the rotation shaft portion 2144 a, and the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 is moved from the retracted position (the state shown in FIG. 124) to the protruding position (FIG. 125). To the state shown).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124, when the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 is in the retracted position, the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 is received in the support hole 2139a of the front base member 2139. The game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 2135 (see FIG. 118) passes through without being received by the velo-shaped projecting piece 2142. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125, when the bello-shaped projecting piece 2142 moves to the projecting position, the ball receiving portion 2142 b of the bello-shaped projecting piece 2142 projects from the support hole 2139 a of the front base member 2139 to the front game area 1100, It becomes possible to receive a game ball that has entered the ball entrance unit 2135. Then, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142 is guided rearward according to the gradient of the ball receiving portion 2142b and falls from the frame portion 2142a. Note that a winning sensor 2137 is disposed below the rear base member 2140 so that a falling game ball can be detected.

  Although the details will be described later, the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142 is housed in the retracted position in the normal gaming state, and a game ball is received at the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (start winning prize is given). ) To move to the protruding position in accordance with the special lottery result drawn (when the special lottery result is “small hit”).

  Next, the second open / close winning device 2104 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 is disposed below the second start port 2102 and allows a game ball to enter through the third opening 2110c (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIGS. 121 and 126, the second open / close winning device 2104 includes a case unit 2152 comprising an upper case 2150 and a lower case 2151 having a large winning opening 2153 in the front and a passage for a game ball formed therein. The prize winning opening 2153 is arranged so as to face the horizontally elongated third opening 2110c formed in the base member 2110. The large winning opening 2153 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118) whose opening can be closed. In the winning door 2154, door shafts 2154a formed at the lower portions of the left and right ends are pivotally supported by a pair of bearing portions 2150c formed on the left and right sides of the front surface of the upper case 2150. And a substantially vertical state in which the game ball cannot be received (the state shown in FIG. 115), and a tilted state in which the upper side is tilted forward to open the special winning opening 2153 and the game ball can be received. It is possible to rotate between the two. Although details will be described later, the winning door 2154 is in a state in which the big winning opening 2153 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 ( It is opened according to the special lottery result drawn by winning the start (when the special lottery result is “big hit”).

  The second open / close winning device 2104 will be described in more detail. The upper case 2150 has a game ball passage inside (lower side), and a sensor accommodation portion 2150b in which the second start port sensor 2166 is accommodated is formed on the upper surface. Has been. Further, on the upper surface side of the lower case 2151, there are formed a passage 2151 a for guiding a game ball won in the big winning opening 2153 and a mechanism accommodating portion 2151 c for accommodating an opening / closing drive mechanism 2155 for opening and closing the winning door 2154. On the lower surface side of the lower case 2151, a sensor housing portion 2151 b for housing a count sensor 2160 that detects a winning game ball is formed. A light emitting substrate 2162 for irradiating and decorating the vicinity of the special winning opening 2153 is disposed below the lower case 2151.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 2155 includes a solenoid 2156 provided horizontally so that the plunger 2157 faces the right side, and a link member 2158 that converts the linear motion of the plunger 2157 in the left-right direction into the rotational motion of the winning door 2154. The link member 2158 sandwiches the rotary shaft portion 2158a inserted into the bearing hole 2150d formed on the right front surface of the upper case 2150 and the claw portion 2154b protruding rearward from the right end side of the winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118). A pair of latching portions 2158b and 2158c that are latched to each other, and a latching portion 2158d that is latched to the plunger 2157 of the solenoid 2156. That is, when the plunger 2157 moves to the left by energizing the solenoid 2156, the link member 2158 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft portion 2158a, and the claw portion 2154b of the winning door 2154 is pushed up by the latching portion 2158b. Thus, the winning door 2154 can be changed from the closed state to the open state. When energization of the solenoid 2156 is stopped, the plunger 2157 is moved to the right by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the link member 2158 is rotated counterclockwise around the rotation shaft portion 2158a. The claw portion 2154b of the winning door 2154 can be pushed down by the latching portion 2158c to change the winning door 2154 from the open state to the closed state.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the winning device unit 2100 is provided with a cover member 2168 that covers the second open / close winning device 2104. The cover member 2168 is substantially U-shaped in a side view, and is formed on the first mounting portion 2168a formed on the left side of the upper stage, to which the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second start port 2102 is attached, and on the extended part of the lower stage. It has a second mounting portion 2168b on which the two open / close winning device 2104 is placed, and a third mounting portion 2168c that is erected from the upper right side and supports the rear end portion of the gate sensor 2176. A relay board 2164 is attached to the rear surface of the cover member 2168, and is attached to the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second start port 2102, the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103, and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104. Drive signals to the solenoids 2128, 2141, 2156 provided respectively, and detection signals from the open / close drive mechanism 2136, the second open / close winning device 2104, and the sensors 2137, 2160, 2166, 2176 provided in the gate unit 2107, respectively. Are relayed by a common board. That is, a harness (not shown) connected to the solenoids 2128, 2141, 2156 and a harness (not shown) connected to the sensors 2137, 2160, 2166, 2176 are arranged behind the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104. Collected on the relay board 2164 and electrically connected to the control board disposed outside via the relay board 2164.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the main lens portion 2112 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110 is formed of a transparent resin, and is formed on the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110 on the front surface. The large window portion 2110f (see FIG. 119) and the small window portion 2110g are respectively formed with a plurality of large fitting portions 2112f and a plurality of small fitting portions 2112g that protrude from the rear side. Further, the rear cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112 has light transmittance, and is a light emitting substrate 3503, 3506, 3507 (in detail, provided independently of the winning device unit 2100). It is possible to transmit light emitted from (described later based on FIG. 162). However, as shown in FIG. 117, the back surface of the rear cover member 2114 has a portion facing the small window portion 2110g of the base member 2110 (that is, a portion matching the small fitting portion 2112g of the main lens portion 2112), and 2114g. The remaining portion (including the portion facing the large window portion 2110f) 2114f has a different light transmittance. Specifically, the portion 2114g facing the small window portion 2110g is transparent, but the remaining portion 2114f has an irregular reflection surface formed by unevenness.

  As described above, according to the prize winning device unit 2100 of this example, the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are attached to the common base member 2110 and configured as one prize winning device unit 2100. Therefore, it is possible to assemble the winning device unit 2100 together with the game panel 1200, and as a result, it is possible to facilitate the assembling work, and to reduce the working time and labor of the assembling. Become.

  In addition, since all the harnesses are gathered on one relay board 2164, the harnesses can be wired together, and the number of harnesses drawn from the entire winning device unit 2100 (ie, drawn from the relay board 2164 to the outside). The number of harnesses) can be reduced, and wiring work can be facilitated.

  The first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are different in configuration from each other, and the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the reception opening for the game ball is relatively small. The second open / close winning device 2104 is long in the left-right direction, that is, the large winning opening 2153 is formed to be relatively large. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2153 is opened, a larger amount of games than the first opening / closing winning device 2103 is achieved. The player can be given an impression that the ball can be won, and the player's expectation for the big prize opening 2153 can be enhanced. Further, since the relay board 2164 is attached to the rear side of the horizontally long second open / close winning device 2104, it is easy to pull out the harness toward the rear of the winning device unit 2100. In addition, since the relay board 2164 is arranged using the space behind the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 generated by the depth difference between the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104, the prize winning device unit 2100. The layout space of the relay board 2164 can be secured without increasing the size.

  By the way, the opening / closing control of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the opening / closing control of the second opening / closing winning prize device 2104 are executed as giving different profits, respectively, but the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are executed. When the device 2104 is attached to the common base member 2110, the two open / close prize-winning devices 2103 and 2104 have a sense of unity, as if two types of profits are given by using one open / close prize-winning device. May be recognized. In other words, despite having two types of open / close winning devices 2103 and 2104, there is no significant difference from changing the opening time and the number of times of opening / closing a single winning device based on the lottery result, which may reduce interest. There is.

  On the other hand, in this example, a notch 2110d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed between the first opening / closing prize-winning device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize-winning device 2104. It becomes possible to give the player the recognition that the device is an open / close winning device. In other words, although the first open / close prize winning device 2103 and the second open / close prize winning device 2104 are combined into one unit, each of the open / close prize winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be controlled by suppressing the visually recognized unity. The presence can be increased, and consequently, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In particular, since a plurality of obstacle nails K implanted in the game panel 1200 are arranged through the notch 2110d, the rolling direction of the game ball is changed between the first open / close prize device 2103 and the second open / close prize device 2104. The behavior of the game ball can be noticed by changing. Therefore, the recognition that the first open / close winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 are separate open / close winning devices can be further increased.

  Further, the game area 1100 below the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 and the game area 1100 below the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 are separated by a dividing line 2110i formed on the front surface of the base member 2110. The two open / close winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be visually separated including the surrounding game area 1100, and the first open / close winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 are separate open / close winning devices. Can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the base member 2110 has a reflective surface on the entire front surface, the entire front surface is shining, increasing the gorgeousness of the lower part of the gaming panel 1200 and making the overall winning device unit 2100 conspicuous. The operations of the winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 can be noted.

  The winning device unit 2100 includes a main lens portion 2112 and a cover member 2114 that transmit light emitted from the rear light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507, and a large window portion 2110 f and a small window formed on the base member 2110. It is possible to project light to the player side through the window 2110g. For this reason, the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g can be decorated with light emission, and the glare of the base member 2110 can be further enhanced. Further, since the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 are arranged separately from the winning device unit 2100, the number of harnesses drawn from the winning device unit 2100 can be reduced to the minimum necessary number. A decrease in workability when the unit 2100 is assembled can be suppressed.

  By the way, since the main lens portion 2112 is transparent, when the light is emitted from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507, the contents disposed behind the winning device unit 2100 are the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g. May be visually recognized through this, and this may impair the appearance. In addition, if a diffuse reflection surface is formed on the cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the contents, but according to this, the amount of light passing through the main lens portion 2112 is reduced. In particular, in the small window portion 2110g, it becomes difficult to shine brightly and become inconspicuous.

  On the other hand, in the present example, a diffuse reflection portion is formed in the portion 2114f of the rear surface of the cover member 2114 that is transmitted toward the large window portion 2110f, but the portion 2114g that is transmitted toward the small window portion 2110g is provided in the portion 2114g. The irregular reflection part is not formed and is transparent. For this reason, the large window portion 2110f is made difficult to see the contents behind the winning device unit 2100 by transmitting the light irradiated from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 while irregularly reflecting the light. By transmitting the light irradiated from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 without irregular reflection to the window 2110g, it is possible to send sufficient light to the small window 2110g to make it brightly shine. Since the small window portion 2110g has a small opening area, even if the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 are transparent, it is difficult to see the contents, and even if it is visible, it is extremely difficult to grasp the appearance of the contents. It becomes. Therefore, even the small window portion 2110g does not impair the appearance.

  Further, since the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100 is further provided with a first starting port 2101, compared to the first starting port 2101 that is assembled as a separate component from the winning device unit 2100, The work time and labor required when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. In addition, since the first start opening 2101 can be disposed close to the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103, the first opening opening 2101 maintains the closed state of the first opening / closing winning prize device 2103 by the first start opening 2101. And the first open / close winning device 2103 can be associated with each other. In particular, since the first start port 2101 is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the first start port 2101 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100 is further provided with a second starting port 2102, compared to a case where the second starting port 2102 is assembled as a separate component from the winning device unit 2100. The work time and labor required when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. Further, the second start port 2102 can be arranged close to the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104.

  Further, the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100 is further provided with a gate portion 2107 and a gate sensor 2176. The work time and labor required when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. Further, the harness connected to the gate sensor 2176 and the harnesses of the two open / close prize winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be collectively passed through one opening portion 1200e, and the layout and wiring work of the harness becomes complicated. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the gate portion 2107 is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the gate portion 2107 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the base member 2110 is formed with a guide portion 2110h for guiding the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2107 to the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 side, when the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 is opened, the gate portion The game ball that has passed 2107 can easily be awarded in the big prize opening 2153. Therefore, expectation other than the lottery can be generated for the passage through the gate portion 2107. Further, since the guide portion 2110h is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the assembling work of the guide portion 2110h with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the configuration of the guide portion 2110h becomes simple.

  The base member 2110 has a fourth opening 2110e formed between the gate 2107 and the second open / close winning device 2104, and the obstacle nail K planted in the game panel 1200 is arranged through the fourth opening 2110e. Therefore, it is possible to change the rolling direction of the game ball from the gate portion 2107 toward the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104, and to pay attention to the behavior of the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the base member 2110 is provided with the general winning ports 2105 and 2106, the base panel 2110 has a game panel 1200 compared to the case where the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 are assembled as separate components from the winning device unit 2100. Work time and labor when assembling can be reduced. In particular, since the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 are formed integrally with the base member 2110, the assembly work of the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

[2-2. Side decoration unit]
The side decoration unit 2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 128. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the side decoration unit as seen from diagonally front. The side decoration unit 2300 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening portion 1200e formed on the left side of the opening portion 1200e into which the prize winning device unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1200. Above, it is fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. The side decoration unit 2300 includes a base member 2301 that is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front and is fixed to the game panel 1200, and a lens body 2304 that is disposed on the rear side of the base member 2301 and is accommodated in the back cover 2305. I have. A display sheet 2302 and a diffusion sheet 2303 are interposed between the base member 2301 and the lens body 2304.

  More specifically, the base member 2301 includes a substantially triangular effect display portion 2301a that protrudes into the game area 1100, and a thin plate-like decoration portion 2301b that extends to the upper side of the effect display portion 2301a. The effect display unit 2301a has a window portion 2301c penetrating in the front-rear direction, a housing portion 2301d is formed therein, and a game ball that rolls the game area 1100 is placed on the top surface of the effect display unit 2301a. A guide rolling surface 2301e for guiding toward the 2100 side is formed. The decorative portion 2301b has two openings 2301f and two notches 2301g, through which the lens body 2304 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, the lens body 2304 is formed of a transparent resin and is fitted into the housing portion 2301d of the base member 2301 from the rear side, and holds a display sheet 2302 and a diffusion sheet 2303, and a decorative portion 2301b. An upper lens portion 2304b disposed on the rear side, and on the front surface of the upper lens portion 2304b, a lower transmission portion 2304c fitted into the lower opening 2301f of the base member 2301 from the rear side, and an upper side An upper transmission portion 2304d that is fitted into the opening 2301f from the rear side and protrudes rearward, and a planar light emitting surface portion 2304e that is fitted from the rear side into the cutout portion 2301g of the base member 2301 are formed.

  The back cover 2305 is formed of a light-transmitting member, and includes a lower housing portion 2305a that houses the sheet pressing portion 2304a of the lens body 2304, and an upper housing portion 2305b that houses the upper lens portion 2304b of the lens body 2304. Have. Further, a cylindrical insertion portion 2305c is formed in the upper housing portion 2305b, and a portion protruding rearward of the upper transmission portion 2304d is fitted. A reflector 2306 is provided between the lower transmissive portion 2304c of the lens body 2304 and the back cover 2305 for efficiently illuminating the lower transmissive portion 2304c with the light applied to the rear surface of the back cover 2305. Yes.

  Behind the back cover 2305, a light emitting substrate 3206 (see FIG. 147) that irradiates light from behind to the lower housing portion 2305a and a light emitting substrate 3205 (see FIG. 147) that irradiates light from the rear to the upper housing portion 2305b. Reference) is provided, and it is possible to irradiate light separately. In particular, the light emitting substrate 3206 irradiates the display sheet 2302 with light, and can project light of a plurality of colors including at least one of the three primary colors and red, which is the other primary color. Full color LED.

  The display sheet 2302 is made of a color filter and has a first transmission unit and a second transmission unit. The first transmission means displays the first pattern by passing only the first color (specifically, red) light projected from the light emitting substrate 3206, while the second transmission means Only the light of the second color (specifically, blue) projected from the light emitting substrate 3206 passes through, so that a second pattern different from the first pattern is displayed. By providing the display sheet 2302 in this manner, it is possible to change the picture visually recognized through the window 2301c of the base member 2301 as necessary, and to suppress the monotonous effect. In particular, since the pattern to be displayed can be changed only by changing the color of the light projected from the light emitting substrate 3206, it can be configured extremely simply. In addition, since the display panel 2302 includes the first transmission unit and the second transmission unit, and the light emitting substrate 3206, the size of the display unit is larger than that of a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. It can be downsized.

  In addition, by providing the diffusion sheet 2303, the light that has passed through the sheet pressing portion 2304a of the lens body 2304 can be evenly irradiated on the entire surface of the display sheet 2302, and the first pattern and the second pattern can be clearly recognized. Is possible.

[2-3. Center character]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 and 129 to 134. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the center feature as seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. 131 is a base frame of the center bonus. FIG. 132 (a) is an exploded perspective view of a member, a warp passage, a shelf board, and a rear shelf cover as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 132 (a) is an enlarged front view of a main part in which the upper left part of the game board is enlarged. b) is an enlarged front view of the main part in which the right center portion of the game board is enlarged, and FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the AA cross section in FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the B-B cross section in FIG. 132 (b) seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 134 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the base frame member and the game panel.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the center accessory 2400 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1200e that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1200, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the center accessory 2400 includes a frame-shaped base frame member 2401, a warp passage 2402 disposed on the left side of the base frame member 2401 and communicating with the outside and the inside of the base frame member 2401, A shelf 2403 having a stage 2403a that is arranged on the inner side of the lower edge of the base frame member 2401 and rolls in the right and left game balls taken in via the warp passage 2402, the back and top of the stage 2403a, and the warp passage And a shelf rear cover 2404 covering the rear side of 2402. Also, as shown in FIG. 129, a right protective member 2406 that covers the path of the game ball located on the right side of the base frame member 2401 from the front is disposed at the lower right side of the base frame member 2401. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the center accessory 2400 is provided with a plurality of decorative bodies 2410 arranged along the inner edge of the opening window 2400a, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the center accessory 2400, Impresses the concept of pachinko machine 1. Hereinafter, each configuration will be described in detail. Here, the base frame member 2401 corresponds to the center frame of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the base frame member 2401 protrudes forward (player side) from the front of the game panel 1200, the insertion portion 2401a inserted into the opening 1200c, and the front of the game panel 1200. A partition wall 2401c that partitions the game area 1100 and the internal space of the base frame member 2401, and a partition wall 2401c that is formed at a right angle to the partition wall 2401c and protrudes radially outward from the insert 2401a. And a thin plate-like flange portion 2401b attached to the front surface. That is, the insertion portion 2401a supports the base frame member 2401 in a state where it is positioned with respect to the opening portion 1200a, and the partition wall portion 2401c partitions the internal space of the base frame member 2401 and the game area 1100, The entry of game balls is blocked.

  By the way, since the some decoration body 2410 provided in the center accessory 2400 is arrange | positioned inside the division wall part 2401c, the large-sized decoration body 2410 is arrange | positioned, so that the magnitude | size of the division wall part 2401c is large. Is possible. In other words, in order to make the decorative body 2410 appear larger, it is necessary to make the size of the partition wall 2401c in the radial direction, that is, the size of the opening window 2400a (see FIG. 129) relatively large. However, when the size of the base frame member 2401 is increased in order to enlarge the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, the area of the game area 1100 in which the game ball rolls in the game panel 1200 becomes relatively narrow, and as a result There is a possibility that the behavior becomes monotonous or it becomes difficult to secure a space for allowing the game ball to pass therethrough.

  On the other hand, in this example, the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin member, and is provided with a game area expansion portion 2401d extending radially inward from the flange portion 2401b. That is, by disposing at least a part of the partition wall portion 2401c at a predetermined position radially inward from the inner edge of the opening portion 1200e in a front view, the expanded game area 1100a is made transparent in front of the opening portion 1200e. It is formed of members.

In order to describe in detail the configuration and operation of this game area expansion unit 2401d, for convenience, the following two pachinko machines are shown as comparative pachinko machines in FIGS. 134 (b) and (c). FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the upper left part of the game board 4 in this example (that is, the part corresponding to FIG. 132 (a)), and FIGS. 134 (b) and 134 (c) are comparative pachinko machines. It is sectional drawing which shows the part corresponded to the same area | region of a machine.
First comparative pachinko machine 5001: As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the size and arrangement position of the opening 5200a of the game panel 5200 and the flange portion 5401b of the base frame member 5401 are respectively (a). It is the same as this example shown in FIG. 1, and does not have a game area expansion unit.
Second comparative pachinko machine 6001: As shown in FIG. 134 (c), the size and arrangement position of the partition wall portion 6401c is the same as that of the present invention, and does not include a game area expansion portion.

  First, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is compared with the first comparative pachinko machine 5001, in this example, the partition wall portion 2401c is radially inward of the inner edge of the opening portion 1200e by providing the game area expanding portion 2401d. (Lower side in FIG. 134). That is, a game area 1100a is formed in front of the opening 1200e, and the game area is wider than that of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001. By the way, according to this structure, the magnitude | size of the opening window 2400a enclosed by the partition wall part 2401c becomes smaller than the opening window 5400a of the 1st comparison pachinko machine 5001. However, in this example, since the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member, the size of the opening window 2400a is smaller than the opening window 5400a of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001. It can be made not to feel. That is, when the entire base frame member 2401 does not transmit light, the boundary between the base frame member 2401 that does not transmit light and the open window 2400a that is opened (that is, the portion that transmits light), that is, the inner edge of the partition wall 2401c The part is emphasized, and this part is recognized as the outer edge of the opening window 2400a, but the partition wall part 2401c and the game area extension part 2401d are formed of a light-transmitting member, so that the light transmitting part and the light are not transmitted. It becomes possible to make the boundary with the part the boundary between the flange part 2401b and the game area expansion part 2401d (that is, the inner edge part of the opening part 1200e formed in the game panel 1200), and the boundary part is made to stand out and the opening window It can be recognized as the outer edge of 2400a. Further, since light leaks from the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d to the player side, the base frame member 2401 itself can be shown larger. Therefore, even if the size of the opening window 2400a is smaller than that of the first comparative pachinko machine 5001 by expanding the game area 1100, it is difficult to give a reduced impression.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is compared with the second comparison pachinko machine 6001 shown in FIG. 134 (c), in this example, the game area expanding part 2401d is provided, so that the flange part 2401b of the base frame member 2401 is provided. And the opening portion 1200e of the gaming panel 1200 is enlarged toward the radially outer side (upper side in FIG. 134) (compared with the flange portion 6401b of the base frame member 6401 and the opening portion 6200a of the gaming panel 6200 shown in FIG. 134C). if you did this). By the way, when the opening portion 1200e of this example becomes larger than the opening portion 6200a of the second comparative pachinko machine 6001, the gaming area 1100 on the gaming panel 1200 becomes relatively narrow, but in front of the opening portion 1200e. Since the game area 1100a is also formed on a certain game area expansion unit 2401d, an area equivalent to that of the second comparison pachinko machine 6001 can be secured as the entire game area. In this example, since the partition wall 2401c and the game area expansion 2401d are formed of a light-transmitting member, as described above, it is a boundary between a portion that transmits light and a portion that does not transmit light. The boundary between the flange portion 2401b and the game area expansion portion 2401d (that is, the inner edge portion of the opening portion 1200e formed in the game panel 1200) can be made to stand out and recognized as the outer edge of the opening window 2400a. Further, since light leaks from the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d to the player side, the base frame member 2401 itself can be shown larger. Therefore, in this example, compared with the second comparison pachinko machine 6001, it is possible to make the opening window 2400a of the base frame member 2401 larger without narrowing the entire game area.

  Further, in the area shown in FIGS. 132 (a) and 133 (a) of this example, a light emitting board 3182 provided in an upper accessory unit 3100 described later is arranged behind the game area expansion unit 2401d. The light is irradiated toward the game area expansion unit 2401d. For this reason, the amount of light passing through the game area expansion part 2401d increases, and there is a difference in brightness between the flange part 2401b where light is blocked by the game panel 1200 and the game area expansion part 2401d irradiated with light through the opening 1200e. It becomes clear and can make those boundaries more noticeable. Further, since the base frame member 2401 including the game area expansion portion 2401d is formed of a transparent resin member, light can be transmitted through the entire game area expansion portion 2401d and the amount of light passing therethrough can be increased. Therefore, the boundary portion between the flange portion 2401b and the game area expanding portion 2401d is further emphasized and becomes conspicuous. In particular, the color of the transparent game area expanding portion 2401d is light purple, which is substantially the same color as the color (purple) of the game panel 1200 around the base frame member 2401. For this reason, the front-end | tip of the flange 2401b also becomes inconspicuous and the boundary part of the flange part 2401b and the game area expansion part 2401d can be made more conspicuous relatively.

  Note that the game area expansion portion 2401d may be formed over the entire circumference of the base frame member 2401, but in this example, the center accessory 2400 is required to change the rolling direction of the game ball in a complicated manner. The upper left game area 1100 (see FIGS. 132 (a) and 133 (a)) and the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2400 that needs to secure a rolling path for the game ball (FIG. 132 (b)) , (See FIG. 133 (b)), the game area expanding portion 2401d is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the warp passage 2402 has a warp inlet 2402a that opens to the outside of the base frame member 2401 and a warp outlet 2402b that opens to the inside of the base frame member 2401, and has a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Presents. That is, it is possible to take a game ball rolling in the game area 1100 on the left side of the base frame member 2401 from the warp inlet 2402a and guide it to the warp outlet 2402b.

  By the way, since the warp passage 2402 is provided in the base frame member 2401, when the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area expansion portion 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member as described above, the presence of the warp passage 2402 exists. Remarkably, it gives the impression that the warp passage 2402 protrudes greatly toward the inside of the opening window. That is, the open window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in this example, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outline of the warp passage 2402 becomes inconspicuous, and it can be suppressed that the opening window 2400a feels small. Although details will be described later, the warp passage 2402 is decorated with light emitted from the rear side.

  The shelf board 2403 has a substantially arc-shaped stage 2403a that rolls the game ball that has flowed into the base frame member 2401 through the warp passage 2402 in the left-right direction. In the stage 2403a, the rolled game ball Can flow out to the game area 1100 above the first start port 2101 from the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2403a or in the vicinity thereof. In particular, a groove-like chance inlet 2403b formed in a downward slope toward the rear is formed at the center of the stage 2403a, and a chance outlet 2403c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed below the chance inlet 2403b. Has been. That is, when the momentum of the game ball passing in the left-right direction is weakened, the game ball rolls backward along the chance entrance 2403b and is sent to the chance passage 2404d formed in the rear shelf cover 2404, and further the chance passage It is possible to discharge from the chance outlet 2403c through 2404d.

  The rear shelf cover 2404 includes a rear wall portion 2404a that covers the back side of the stage 2403a, an upper wall portion 2404b that covers the upper side of the stage 2403, and a warp wall portion 2404c that closes the rear surface of the warp passage 2402. The rear wall 2404a is formed with a chance passage 2404d that communicates the chance entrance 2403b and the chance exit 2403c of the shelf 2403.

  By the way, since the shelf 2403 and the shelf rear cover 2404 are arranged inside the lower edge of the game area expansion portion 2401d, when the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin as described above, Presence of the 2403 and the rear shelf cover 2404 stands out, giving the impression that they are protruding greatly toward the inside of the opening window 2400a. That is, the open window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in this example, since the shelf 2403 and the rear shelf cover 2404 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outline of the shelf 2403 and the rear shelf cover 2404 becomes inconspicuous and the opening window 2400a feels small. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the right protective member 2406 rebounds to the player side when a game ball that rolls (falls) in the game area 1100 on the right side of the base frame member 2401 collides with the protrusion 2401 e. Are formed on the lower side of the rolling direction guide 2406b, the rolling direction guide 2406b extending from the lower end of the protection 2406a in the right-right direction and changing the rolling direction of the game ball. And an ornament mounting portion 2406c to which a lower right plated ornament 2447 is attached. The protrusions 2401e are formed on the right game area expansion part 2401d, project from the front game area 1100a, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. The momentum of the rolling game ball is suppressed by sequentially causing the rolling ball to collide with the protrusion 2401e.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the center accessory 2400 decorates the upper left decoration unit 2411 arranged at the upper left of the base frame member 2401 and the warp passage 2402 arranged below the upper part as a plurality of decoration bodies 2410. A warp passage decoration unit 2412, an upper right decoration unit 2413 disposed at the upper right of the base frame member 2401, and a right decoration unit 2414 disposed below the upper right decoration unit 2414 are provided. The upper left decoration unit 2411 includes a light-transmitting logo front ornament 2420 that represents a predetermined character, a light diffusion sheet 2421 that is disposed behind the logo front ornament 2420 and diffuses light passing therethrough, and a light diffusion sheet 2421. A light transmissive sheet presser 2422 supported from the rear side is configured to be decorated with light emitted by light (details will be described later) irradiated from the rear side. This logo front ornament 2420 corresponds to a specific character portion of the present invention, and is arranged adjacent to the left side of a logo display unit 3400 described later, and is combined with a series of characters in the logo display unit 3400. One character language (a logo indicating the model name and title name of the pachinko machine 1) is formed (see FIG. 160a). A decorative lens 2423 is attached to the upper end portion of the logo front decoration 2420.

  The warp path decoration unit 2412 includes a colorless and transparent warp lens 2426 that is mounted so as to cover the upper part of the warp path 2402 from the front side, and a warp decoration 2425 that is mounted on the front side of the warp lens 2426. The warp decoration 2425 has a plurality of window portions 2425a in which a reflection surface is formed on the entire surface by plating and the warp lens 2426 is partially visible. The lower part of the warp passage 2402 is not covered with the warp decoration 2425 and is exposed. The light emission decoration of the warp passage decoration unit 2412 will be described later.

  The upper right decoration unit 2413 is disposed on a light-transmitting right base 2430 disposed over the entire right side of the base frame member 2401, and extends from an annular ornament body 2431a and its upper and lower portions. A decorative frame 2431 formed of an arc-shaped decoration 2431b, a logo lens 2432 that is inserted from the front side into the upper opening 2430a of the right base 2430 and has a predetermined character, and a right side that is disposed on the rear side of the base frame member 2401 A light emitting substrate 2433 that irradiates light to the base 2430 from behind, and light emitted from the upper side of the light emitting substrate 2433 is efficiently irradiated to the vicinity of the upper opening 2430a (that is, the portion corresponding to the interior of the decorative body 2431a of the decorative frame 2431). And a reflector 2434. In addition, a smoke ball-shaped decoration 2435 into which a plurality of protrusions 2430b formed on the right base 2430 are inserted is disposed above and obliquely below the right of the decoration frame 2431, respectively.

  The right decoration unit 2414 is externally fitted to a disk-shaped protrusion 2430c formed on the lower portion of the right base 2430 from the front side, and a plating ornament 2437 whose surface is plated, and a rear side in the protrusion 2430c. And a smoke-shaped ornament 2439 that is arranged and incorporated in the plated ornament 2437 and can produce an effect of rising smoke, and is irradiated from the light-emitting substrate 2433. The projection 2430c of the right base 2430 and the smoke-shaped decoration 2439 can be illuminated and decorated by the light.

  In addition, a 7-segment display 2441 is disposed at the lower left portion of the front surface of the right base 2430 so as to protrude to the left of the right base 2430. The 7-segment display 2441 includes a front ornament 2442 having a circular window portion 2442a, a half mirror 2443 that is accommodated in the front ornament 2442 and visible through the window portion 2442a, and light that is disposed behind and passes through the half mirror 2443. A sheet 2444 for diffusing light, a light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2433 is efficiently projected toward the diffusion sheet 2444, and a reflector 2445 having a slit 2445a corresponding to a number segment is disposed on the left side of the reflector 2445. And a red lens 2446 for projecting red light through the window of the 7-segment display 2441. That is, the LED corresponding to the two-digit number to be displayed is selected from the LEDs on the light emitting substrate 2433 arranged to be opposed to the 7-segment display 2441 so as to emit light, so that the diffusion sheet 2444 is passed through the predetermined slit 2445a. In addition, it is possible to project light onto the half mirror 2443 and project an image of the slit 2445a (that is, a numerical image) on the back surface of the half mirror 2443. Further, by providing the half mirror 2443, a portion that does not face the slit 2445a and a portion that faces the slit 2445a but is not irradiated with light serve as a reflection surface when viewed from the player side, and the inside of the 7-segment display 2441 The structure is hidden from the player.

[2-4. Back unit]
Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 135 to 165. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit that is disassembled for each main component and is viewed from the oblique front. FIG. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view in which the upper accessory unit is viewed from obliquely in front by disassembling the upper accessory unit into a large unit portion and a small unit portion; FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view in which the large unit portion is disassembled for each of the main components and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view in which the rotary unit in the large unit portion is disassembled and viewed from the oblique front. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the large-side light-emitting rotating unit and the small-side light-emitting rotating unit in the rotating unit as exploded and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 142 (a) is a small-side light emitting rotating unit. And its drive part is cut longitudinally and viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 142 (b) is a perspective view of the small side cover member as viewed obliquely from below, and FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the small side light emitting rotating part and its drive as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body in the small unit portion disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the rotating decorative body cut in the vertical direction and viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view in which the enclosure unit of the small unit portion is disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the left hand side unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the left hand side unit, and FIG. 149 shows the left side hand unit. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view in which main components are disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view in which a main part of the left accessory unit is disassembled and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative body in the left handed object unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the right side accessory unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 153 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the right side accessory unit, and FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of each of the main components disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the movable decorative body in the right accessory unit viewed obliquely from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view in which the body is disassembled for each of the main components and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view in which the movable body in the movable decorative body is disassembled and viewed from the obliquely front. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the movable arm portion of the movable decorative body disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the drive mechanism in the right accessory unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. .

  FIG. 160 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory provided with the logo display unit in the back unit as viewed from the lower front side, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and FIG. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the logo display unit as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the logo display unit as seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. 163 is an oblique view of the back shelf decoration unit in the back unit. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view in which the other components of the back unit are disassembled for each main component member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded view of the display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 112, 135, and 136, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200, and is mainly separated from the game panel 1200 to the rear side by a predetermined distance in the back box 3001. The liquid crystal display device 1900 supported in the position (omitted in FIGS. 135 and 136), the upper accessory unit 3100 disposed in the upper space of the back box 3001, and the left accessory disposed in the left space of the back box 3001. A unit 3200, a right accessory unit 3300 disposed in the right space of the back box 3001, a logo display unit 3400 disposed below the upper accessory unit 3100, and a back of the shelf disposed in the lower space of the back box 3001. And a decoration unit 3502.

  First, the back box 3001 will be described. As shown in FIG. 164, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. The game panel 1200 (see FIG. 114) is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be seen through the opening 3001c. . Further, the back box 3001 has an appropriate position for attaching the upper accessory unit 3100, the left accessory unit 3200, the right accessory unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, the back shelf decoration unit 3502, and the like. Is formed.

  Next, the upper accessory unit 3100 will be described in detail. The upper accessory unit 3100 is disposed on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The length in the left-right direction is substantially equal to the horizontal width of the display screen 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player side (ie, the display screen 1900a). It is placed so as to protrude greatly forward).

  As shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the upper accessory unit 3100 is roughly divided into a large unit portion 3101 and a small unit portion 3102. As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the large unit portion 3101 is disposed on the base member 3110, a thin box-like base member 3110 having an open upper surface, a base cover 3111 covering the upper surface of the base member 3110, and the base member 3110. Light is applied to the rotation unit 3112, the enclosure member 3113 that covers the rear half of the rotation unit 3112 from the rear side, the rear lens member 3114 disposed on the rear side of the enclosure member 3113, and the rear lens member 3114 from behind. A light emitting substrate 3115 and a lower decorative member 3116 which is fixed to the base member 3110 and arranged so as to cover the lower part of the rotating unit 3112 from the front side are provided.

  The rotation unit 3112 will be described in detail based on FIGS. 139 and 140. The rotation unit 3112 includes a large side light emission rotation unit 3120 that can change the light emission direction while emitting light, a small side light emission rotation unit 3121 that is smaller than the large side light emission rotation unit 3120, and a large side light emission rotation unit 3120. A large-side cover member 3122 that covers and rotates integrally with the large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120, a small-side cover member 3123 that covers the small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121 and rotates integrally with the small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121, The large-side upper decorative member 3124 and the small-side upper decorative member 3125 attached to the tops of the side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123, respectively, and the large-side light emitting rotating unit 3120 and the small-side light emitting rotating unit 3121, respectively. A large-side drive unit 3126 and a small-side drive unit 3130 for applying a rotational force are provided. Here, the large side driving means 3126 and the small side driving means 3130 correspond to the driving means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 to 141, the large-side light emitting rotation unit 3120 is disposed in the large-side accommodating portion 3110 a of the base member 3110, and is a rectangular center disposed in the central substrate accommodating portion 3110 c of the base member 3110. A light emitting substrate 3135, an arc-shaped peripheral light emitting substrate 3136 disposed around the central light emitting substrate 3135, a lens 3137 attached to the base member 3110 so as to cover the central light emitting substrate 3135, and the large side of the base member 3110 A rotating ring 3138 supported rotatably around a cylindrical support cylinder 3110d protruding from the housing 3110a, and a reflector 3139 connected to the rotating ring 3138 and rotating integrally with the rotating ring 3138. , And a photo sensor 3140 for detecting a rotation position (origin position) of the rotation ring 3138. Here, the support tube portion 3110d corresponds to the support portion of the present invention, and the central light emitting substrate 3135 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  The rotation ring 3138 has a through hole 3138a fitted around the support cylinder 3110d of the base member 3110 as a center, and is disposed so as to surround the central light emitting substrate 3135 disposed in the central substrate housing 3110c. Further, on the upper surface of the rotating ring 3138, three columnar connecting portions 3138b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3139 are provided upright. Further, teeth 3138c are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3138 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3137 has a disk shape and is disposed on the upper side of the rotating ring 3138. The outer diameter of the lens 3137 is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 3138a of the rotating ring 3138. In addition, a plurality of protrusions 3137a are formed on the upper surface of the lens 3137 so that the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 can be converged and applied to the reflecting mirror 3139.

  The reflecting mirror 3139 has a spherical appearance with the front and bottom surfaces open, and the inner surface reflects light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 via the lens 3137, that is, light emitted from below. Thus, it has a reflecting surface 3139a that projects in the horizontal direction (forward). In addition, the reflecting mirror 3139 includes three connected portions 3139b arranged at predetermined intervals along the outer periphery, and is connected to the connecting portion 3138b of the rotating ring 3138 with a screw (not shown). The rotating ring 3138 is integrally assembled. In addition, three columnar connection portions 3139c for connecting the large-side cover member 3122 are provided upright on the top portion and the rear surface side of the reflecting mirror 3139.

  On the other hand, the small-side light emitting rotation unit 3121 is disposed in the small-side accommodating portion 3110b of the base member 3110, and covers the light-emitting substrate 3142 disposed in the substrate accommodating portion 3110f of the base member 3110 and the light-emitting substrate 3142. A lens 3143 attached to the base member 3110; a rotating ring 3144 supported rotatably around the lens 3143; a reflecting mirror 3145 connected to the rotating ring 3144 and rotating integrally with the rotating ring 3144; And a photosensor 3146 that detects a rotation position (origin position) of the ring 3144. Here, the light emitting substrate 3142 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention, and the lens 3143 corresponds to the support portion of the present invention.

  The rotating ring 3144 has a through-hole portion 3144a fitted around the outer peripheral surface 3143b of the lens 3143 as a center, and is disposed so as to surround the light emitting substrate 3142. In addition, a columnar connection portion 3144 b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3145 is provided upright on the upper surface of the rotating ring 3144. Further, teeth 3144c are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3144 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3143 has a disk shape, and a leg portion 3143c for attaching to the base member 3110 is suspended from the bottom surface. A plurality of protrusions 3143a are formed on the upper surface of the lens 3143 so that the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 can be converged and irradiated on the reflecting mirror 3145.

  The reflecting mirror 3145 has a spherical appearance with the front and bottom surfaces open, and the inner surface reflects light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 through the lens 3143, that is, light emitted from below. And a reflecting surface 3145a that projects in the horizontal direction (forward). The reflecting mirror 3145 includes two connected portions 3145b disposed at a predetermined interval along the outer periphery, and is connected to the connecting portion 3144b of the rotating ring 3144 by screws (not shown). The rotating ring 3144 is integrally assembled. Further, a connecting portion 3145c for connecting the small-side upper decorative member 3125 is formed on the top of the reflecting mirror 3145.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the large-side cover member 3122 is formed of a hemispherical light-transmitting member, covers the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120 from the upper side, and is screwed onto the connection portion 3139c of the reflecting mirror 3139 ( (Not shown). Similarly to the large side cover member 3122, the small side cover member 3123 is formed of a hemispherical light-transmitting member, covers the small side light emitting rotating part 3121 from the upper side, and is screwed to the connection part 3145c of the reflecting mirror 3145 ( (Not shown).

  By the way, the conventionally well-known rotating lamp decoration body simply changes the light projection direction and cannot visually recognize the dynamic change like the movable decoration body. It was. For this reason, even if the rotating lamp decoration body is sufficient as a notification means, it is insufficient as a production device, and there is a possibility that the visual interest in production is reduced.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are connected to the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, respectively, the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are connected to the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145. It can be rotated integrally. For this reason, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the rotation operation of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 along with the change of the light projecting direction, and enhance the visual interest as the production device by the dynamic change. Is possible. Further, as the power for rotating the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, the large side driving means 3126 and the small side driving means 3130 for turning the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 are used. The large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 can be rotated without providing any driving means, and can be configured simply and inexpensively. Further, since the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 and the large cover member 3122 or the small cover member 3123 rotate integrally, light is projected from the inside of the large cover member 3122 or the small cover member 3123. Rather, the surface of the large side cover member 3122 or the small side cover member 3123 can appear to emit light, and the player's attention can be further attracted by a light emission effect different from the conventional one. Become.

  In addition, the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are not exposed to the structure of the large side light emitting rotation unit 3120 and the small side light emission rotation unit 3121 through the light transmissive large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123. Thus, it has the turbidity means which suppresses transparency. Since the turbidity means of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 have the same structure, the turbidity means of the small side cover member 3123 will be described below with reference to FIG. Description of the turbidity means is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the turbidity means of the small cover member 3123 is formed by a first uneven portion 3150 and a second uneven portion 3151 formed on the outer surface and the inner surface of the small cover member 3123, respectively. For this reason, transparency can be suppressed with a relatively simple configuration, and light is dispersed by the concavo-convex shape, so that a relatively wide range on the surface of the small-side cover member 3123 can be illuminated.

  In particular, the small cover member 3123 has an irradiation region 3123a that is irradiated with light facing the inner surface (reflection surface 3145a) of the reflecting mirror 3145 and a non-irradiation region 3123b that is not irradiated with light facing the outer surface of the reflecting mirror 3145. The turbidity of the non-irradiation region 3123b is higher than the turbidity of the irradiation region 3123a. Specifically, the first uneven portion 3150 formed on the outer surface of the small side cover member 3123 has a predetermined pattern (for example, vertical unevenness due to a horizontal groove) over the entire outer surface of the small side cover member 3123. On the other hand, the second concavo-convex portion 3151 formed on the inner surface of the small cover member 3123 is formed only on the non-irradiation region 3123b and has a different pattern (for example, in the vertical direction) Horizontal unevenness due to grooves). In other words, in the irradiated region 3123a, vertical unevenness is formed by the first uneven portion 3150, and in the non-irradiated region 3123b, lattice-like unevenness is formed by both the first uneven portion 3150 on the outer surface and the second uneven portion 3151 on the inner surface. Is formed.

  For this reason, in the irradiation region 3123a, the small side cover member 3123 can be brightly lit by increasing the light transmittance. On the other hand, in the non-irradiation region 3123b, the internal structure can be reduced by reducing the light transmittance. It can be made difficult to visually recognize. Further, the turbidity means formed on the outer surface of the small cover member 3123 is only the first concavo-convex portion 3150 and is formed over the entire surface. It can obscure the boundary.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, a large-side upper decorative member 3124 is attached to the top of the large-side cover member 3122, and a small-side upper decorative member 3125 is attached to the top of the small-side cover member 3123. . These upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are formed of a member that does not transmit light, and the surface thereof is plated. For this reason, the upper decorative member 3124, 3125 can be made to stand out and the decorativeness of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 can be enhanced. Further, since the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are arranged at the tops of the large cover member 3122 and the small cover member 3123, that is, in the vicinity of the rotation axis, the light is not blocked to the player side. Even if the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 rotate, the fluctuation of the upper decoration members 3124 and 3125 is suppressed to be small, and the rotation of the upper decoration members 3124 and 3125 rotates the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123. It can be suppressed that the operation is too conspicuous, that is, the change in the light projection direction becomes relatively inconspicuous.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the large-side driving means 3126 that applies a rotational force to the rotation ring 3138 of the large-side light emitting rotation unit 3120 includes a motor 3127 attached to the upper surface of the base cover 3111, and the base cover 3111. A motor gear 3128 housed in the motor 3127 and connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3127, and a bearing 3110e of the base member 3110 and an inner tooth portion 3129a meshing with the motor gear 3128 and a tooth 3138c of the rotation ring 3138 ( 141) and a transmission gear 3129 having an outer tooth portion 3129b meshing therewith. That is, when the motor 3127 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3138 through the motor gear 3128 and the transmission gear 3129, and the reflecting mirror 3139 and the large-side cover member 3122 rotate together with the rotating ring 3138. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the small driving means 3130 for applying a rotational force to the rotating ring 3144 of the small light emitting rotating unit 3121 is attached to the upper surface of the base cover 3111 (see FIG. 139). The motor 3131 includes a motor gear 3132 housed in the base cover 3111 and connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3131, and the teeth of the motor gear 3132 are meshed with the teeth 3144 c of the rotating ring 3144. . That is, when the motor 3131 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3144 via the motor gear 3132, and the reflecting mirror 3145 and the small cover member 3123 rotate together with the rotating ring 3144. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the surrounding member 3113 is disposed so as to surround the rear half portion of the large-side cover member 3122 from the rear side, and the inner surface thereof is subjected to light-reflecting surface 3113 a by plating. Is formed. That is, when the projection direction of the light emitted from the large-side cover member 3122 faces the rear side (that is, the side opposite to the player), the light is reflected to the player side by the light reflecting surface 3113a of the surrounding member 3113. It is possible to make it. Therefore, even when the light emitted from the large side cover member 3122 faces the rear side, the light is reflected from the large side cover member 3122 by reflecting the light to the player side by the light reflecting surface 3113a of the surrounding member 3113. It makes it possible for the player to recognize that the light is shining and to further enhance the visual interest and decoration.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the back lens member 3114 is disposed behind the enclosing member 3113, and can guide the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3115 to a predetermined part of the enclosing member 3113. ing. Specifically, the rear lens member 3114 protrudes forward from the front surface of the support portion 3114a that supports the enclosure member 3113 and the light emitting substrate 3115 and the support portion 3114a, and enters the through hole 3113c formed in the enclosure member 3113 from the rear side. And a rod-shaped light guiding portion 3114b to be inserted. By projecting light from the tip of the light guiding portion 3114b, the large-side cover member 3122 can be irradiated with light. For this reason, the large-side cover member 3122 can be lifted brightly, and the player's attention can be further attracted.

  By the way, since the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 rotate integrally with the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, they are supported in a floating state so as not to cause sliding resistance. However, according to this, the base member 3110 and the rotating unit 3112 are exposed from the lower side of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, and there is a possibility that the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in this example, a lower decorative member 3116 that covers the lower side of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 is provided. The lower decorative member 3116 includes an attachment portion 3116a attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3110, and a decorative portion 3116b that covers the outer periphery of the lower ends of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 from the front. For this reason, exposure of the base member 3110 or the rotation unit 3112 can be prevented, and the deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138, the small unit portion 3102 includes a rotating body decorative body 3162 and an enclosure unit 3163 disposed on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the rotating body decorative body 3162 includes a thin box-like base member 3165 having an open upper surface, a base cover 3166 that covers the upper surface of the base member 3165 and has an opening 3166a, and a base And a light emission rotating portion 3167 disposed on the member 3165. The light emitting rotation unit 3167 is fitted on the lens 3168 and the light emitting substrate 3171 accommodated in the accommodating portion 3165a of the base member 3165, the lens 3168 attached to the base member 3165 so as to cover the light emitting substrate 3171 from above. A rotating ring 3169 that is rotatably supported by the rotating ring 3169, and a reflecting mirror 3170 that is connected to the upper surface of the rotating ring 3169 and has a reflecting surface 3170a that reflects light irradiated from below through the lens 3168 in the horizontal direction on the inner surface. Yes. The rotating body decorative body 3162 covers the lens 3168 and the reflecting mirror 3170 of the light emitting rotating unit 3167 from above, and is attached to the cover member 3172 connected to the connecting portion 3170b of the reflecting mirror 3170 and the top of the cover member 3172. An upper decorative member 3173, a lower decorative member 3174 that is attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 and covers the lower part of the light emitting rotating part 3167 from the front side, and a driving means 3175 that applies a rotational force to the light emitting rotating part 3167. And a photosensor 3178 for detecting the rotational position (origin position) of the rotating ring 3169. The driving means 3175 is arranged in a motor 3176 attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 from the lower side and a left housing portion 3165b of the base member 3165, and a motor gear 3177 connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3176. It consists of and. The motor gear 3177 is meshed with teeth 3169a formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3169 so that the rotational force of the motor 3176 can be transmitted to the rotating ring 3169. Note that these configurations are the same as the configurations of the large unit portion 3101, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. Here, the lens 3168 corresponds to the support portion of the present invention, and the light emitting substrate 3171 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146, the enclosure unit 3163 includes an enclosure member 3180 and a back lens member 3181 and a light emitting substrate 3182 disposed on the rear side. The enclosing member 3180 includes a spherical left concave surface portion 3180a and a right concave surface portion that respectively cover the cover member 3172 (see FIG. 145) of the light emission rotation portion 3167 and the small side cover member 3123 of the small light emission rotation portion 3121 (see FIG. 139). 3180b, and a light reflecting surface is formed on the left concave surface portion 3180a and the right concave surface portion 3180b by plating. A plurality of through holes 3180c penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the left concave surface portion 3180a and the right concave surface portion 3180b. On the other hand, the back lens member 3181 is provided with a plurality of columnar light guiding portions 3181a that are inserted into the through-hole portions 3180c of the enclosure member 3180 from the rear side. In other words, the cover member 3172 and the small cover member 3123 can be irradiated with light by projecting the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3182 from the tip of the light guiding portion 3181a.

  As described above, in this example, by providing the plurality of cover members 3122, 3123, and 3172 having substantially the same external shape and different sizes, it is possible to perform a powerful performance, and the contents of the notification information It becomes possible to associate (for example, the height of expectation) and the size of the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172 to be rotated, and it is possible to further enhance the effect in the upper accessory unit 3100.

  The winning device unit 2100 of this example has stop control means for stopping the rotation at a predetermined position after rotating the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172, and the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172. The position where the irradiation area is directed to the player side (the position shown in FIG. 142 (a)) is stopped as the origin position. For this reason, even when the light emission operation is started simultaneously with the rotation operation of the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172 and the reflecting mirrors 3139, 3145, 3170, or when the light emission is started earlier than the rotation operation, light is projected toward the player. It is possible to start the production from the lighted state, that is, the state where the player feels the brightest, thereby increasing the stimulation to the player and increasing the impact.

  Next, the left accessory unit 3200 will be described. The left accessory unit 3200 includes a movable ornament body 3202, and as shown in FIG. 108 and FIG. 148 (a), at least most of the movable ornament body 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 148 (b), it is possible to move between the stand-by position and the effect position where at least the most part is visible through the opening window 2400 a of the center accessory 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, the left accessory unit 3200 includes a base plate 3201, a movable decorative body 3202 supported so as to be movable with respect to the base plate 3201, and a movable decorative body 3202 attached to the base plate 3201. And a driving unit cover 3204 that covers the base plate 3201 from the front side. Note that two light emitting substrates 3205 and 3206 for irradiating light to the side decoration unit 2300 (see FIG. 128) described above are attached to the front surface of the drive unit cover 3204.

  As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the movable decorative body 3202 includes a movable part ornament 3210 whose upper side simulates the shape of a lamp and whose lower side simulates a pedestal, and a lens disposed on the rear side of the movable part ornament 3210. A member 3211, a light emitting substrate 3212 that irradiates the lens member 3211 with light from behind, a back cover 3213 that closes the rear surface in a state where the lens member 3211 and the light emitting substrate 3212 are accommodated between the movable portion ornament 3210, and a movable portion ornament A gear 3214 attached from the rear side is provided at the lower part of 3210.

  The movable part decoration 3210 has a through hole 3210a in the lower part that matches a center hole 3214a formed at the rotation center of the gear 3214, and includes one large window part 3210b and three small window parts 3210c into which the lens member 3211 is inserted. Are formed penetrating in the front-rear direction. The large window portion 3210b is arranged at the center portion of the lamp shape formed on the upper side, and the small window portion 3210c is arranged side by side on the right end portion of the pedestal shape formed on the lower side. A screw hole P is formed in the lower left portion of the movable part decoration 3210.

  The lens member 3211 is formed of a light-transmitting member, and includes a disk-shaped first light emitting part 3220 inserted into the large window part 3210b of the movable part decoration 3210, and three second parts inserted into the small window parts 3210c. A light emitting portion 3221. Further, the lens member 3211 is provided with a third light emitting unit 3222 at a position protruding from the tip of the lamp-shaped portion of the movable part decoration 3210 so that the lens member 3211 can be visually recognized in a state of protruding from the tip of the movable part decoration 3210. It has become.

  The light emitting substrate 3212 irradiates the lens member 3211 with light from behind, and is disposed at a position facing the first light emitting unit 3220, the second light emitting unit 3221, and the third light emitting unit 3222 of the lens member 3211. A plurality of light emitting diodes 3212a, 3212b, and 3212c are mounted.

  A through hole 3213a is formed in the back cover 3213 at a portion corresponding to the screw hole P of the movable part decoration 3210, and a bush 3215 is inserted from the rear. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, with the movable decorative body 3202 disposed on the front side of the base plate 3201, the bush 3215 is inserted into the arcuate guide hole 3201 a formed at the top of the base plate 3201 from the rear, The bush 3215 is attached to the back surface of the movable decorative body 3202 by bringing the bush 3215 into contact with the screw hole P through the through hole 3213a of the back cover 3213 and further fastening the bush 3215 with a screw (not shown). . Here, since the diameter of the flange 3215a of the bush 3215 is larger than the groove width of the guide hole 3201a, the moving direction of the movable decorative body 3202 is limited by the bush 3215, and it slides along the guide hole 3201a. Yes. In addition, the guide hole 3201a is formed along the circular arc centering on the bearing part 3201b mentioned later.

  The gear 3214 has a fan shape, and a center hole 3214a is externally fitted to an annular bearing portion 3201b formed in the base plate 3201. That is, it can be rotated around the bearing portion 3201b. Further, a tooth portion 3214 b is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 3214 and meshes with the transmission gear 3232 of the drive mechanism 3203. The base plate 3201 is also formed with a pair of stoppers 3201g that limit the rotation range of the gear 3214 when the gear 3214 hits. Further, a detection piece 3214c for detecting the origin position of the gear 3214 by the photo sensor 3233 is formed at the outer peripheral end of the gear 3214.

  The drive mechanism 3203 includes a motor 3230 attached to the rear surface of the base plate 3201 and having the rotation shaft 3230a inserted through the through hole 3201d of the base plate 3201, and a motor gear 3231 connected to the rotation shaft 3230a from the front side of the base plate 3201. , And a transmission gear 3232 that is pivotally supported by a rotating shaft portion 3201c formed slightly lower left than the center portion of the base plate 3201 and meshed with a motor gear 3231 and a gear 3214. That is, when the motor 3230 is operated, the rotational force is transmitted to the gear 3214 via the motor gear 3231 and the transmission gear 3232, and the gear 3214 and the movable decorative body 3202 are rotated around the bearing portion 3201b.

  By the way, the movable decorative body 3202 of the left accessory unit 3200 is disposed behind the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 108), particularly behind the warp passage 2402, when it is in the standby position, It becomes difficult to see. On the other hand, the details of the warp passage 2402 are as described above. However, since the general warp passage is hidden in the center accessory 2400, even if a game ball is taken into the warp passage, I couldn't notice that, and as a result, I couldn't draw attention to the warp passage. Therefore, if the warp passage is formed of a transparent member, the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized, and it can be recognized whether or not a game ball is taken into the warp passage. Further, if the transparent warp passage is irradiated with light from the rear to emit light, the warp passage can be made conspicuous. That is, although it is formed of a transparent member, it is possible to produce decorativeness and presence in the warp passage.

  However, in order to employ the above-described configuration, the light emitting means must be provided behind the warp passage. According to this, the configuration around the warp passage becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases. Further, in a gaming machine including a movable accessory (for example, the left accessory unit 3200) in the back unit, the space behind the center accessory 2400 is used as an accommodation space for the accessory, so the arrangement space for the light emitting means is reduced. It may be difficult to ensure.

  In contrast, in this example, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the movable decorative body 3202 at the standby position is disposed behind the warp passage 2402, and the first light emitting unit 3220 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 is provided. The second light emitting unit 3221 emits light not only when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the effect position (see FIG. 148 (b)) but also when in the standby position (see FIG. 148 (a)). For this reason, when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is irradiated to the rear surface of the warp passage 2402 and passes through the transparent warp passage 2402 to the player side. Lighted. That is, the warp passage 2402 can be decorated with light emitted from the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221. In this way, by using the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 at the standby position, the warp passage 2402 can be illuminated without providing a dedicated light emitting means, and the warp passage 2402 is simple and inexpensive. The decorativeness can be improved.

  In particular, in this example, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a transparent member, a game ball passing through the warp passage 2402 can be visually recognized more clearly. Further, the light transmittance in the warp passage 2402 is increased, and the light intensity of the first light emitting part 3220 and the second light emitting part 3221 is compared even when the size of the first light emitting part 3220 and the second light emitting part 3221 is relatively small. Even when the temperature is low, the warp passage 2402 can be brightly illuminated by the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, a warp decoration 2425 that has at least one window 2425 a and does not transmit light is provided on the front side of the warp passage 2402 so as to cover a part of the warp passage 2402. It has been. That is, in the portion where the warp ornament 2425 is provided, the light that has passed through the warp passage 2402 is projected to the player side through the window 2425a. For this reason, the light emission decoration by the warp passage 2402 and the decoration by the warp decoration 2425 can be combined, and the decorativeness can be further enhanced. In addition, by providing the warp ornament 2425, a portion that can be visually recognized in the warp passage 2402 is limited, and thus it is difficult to grasp the appearance of the movable decorative body 3202. That is, it is possible to suppress the movable decorative body 3202 from being visually recognized as the background of the warp passage 2402. When the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the window 2425a of the warp decoration 2425 and the first light emitting portion 3220 of the movable decorative body 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction. For this reason, a part of the warp passage 2402 that can be visually recognized through the window portion 2425a can be efficiently illuminated.

  Further, three second light emitting portions 3221 are provided, and these are arranged so as to be aligned in a line along the warp passage 2402 when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position (see FIG. 148 (a)). ). For this reason, even if the movable decorative body 3202 and the warp passage 2402 are disposed close to each other, the entire warp passage 2402 can be illuminated brightly and uniformly. In addition, since the light reflecting portion is formed on the front surface of the movable decorative body 3202, a portion other than the first light emitting portion 3220 and the second light emitting portion 3221, that is, a portion that does not emit light can be made to glitter. And the decorativeness of the warp passage 2402 can be further enhanced.

  Further, in this example, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the effect position, or when moving from the effect position to the standby position, the light emission states of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 are temporarily interrupted. In other words, it is controlled to turn off once. Therefore, the continuity between the light emission control at the standby position and the light emission control at the effect position is lost, and the first light emitting part 3220 and the second light emitting part 3221 of the movable decorative body 3202 are used as light emitting means for irradiating the warp passage 2402 with light. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that he / she is using. Therefore, it is possible to prevent arousing unnaturalness and arousing the suspicion that “the device does not move due to a failure” with respect to the fact that the movable decorative body 3202 emits light at the standby position.

  By the way, the movable decorative body 3202 has a constantly exposed portion that is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 even in the standby position. Further, the third light emitting portion 3222 is also provided as a light emitting decoration portion in this constantly exposed portion, and it is possible to make the light emitting decoration during the production operation. However, in this example, there is a light emission restricting means, and when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the light emission of the third light emitting unit 3222 arranged at the constantly exposed portion is prohibited. In other words, the third light emitting unit 3222 that is not located behind the warp passage 2402 and is directly visible from the player side in the standby position is kept off without being emitted. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the movable decorative body 3202 is used as the light emitting means for irradiating light to the warp passage 2402, and not to cause unnaturalness and suspicion. it can.

  Next, the right hand accessory unit 3300 will be described. The right accessory unit 3300 includes a movable ornament 3302, and as shown in FIGS. 108 and 153 (a), at least most of the movable ornament 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400. As shown in FIGS. 167 and 153 (b), it is possible to move between the stand-by position and the effect position where at least most of the center role is visible through the opening window 2400 a of the center accessory 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the right accessory unit 3300 is disposed on the base member 3301 having a U-shape in front view, a movable decorative body 3302 supported so as to be movable with respect to the base member 3301, and the base member 3301. And a drive mechanism 3303 for operating the movable decorative body 3302. A gear cover 3304 that covers the drive mechanism 3303 from the front side is provided on the upper front surface of the base member 3301, and a lower cover 3305 and a light emitting substrate 3306 are provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3301.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the movable decorative body 3302 includes a movable part main body 3310 that imitates the character's torso and face, and a movable arm part 3311 that imitates the character's arm part. The movable arm portion 3311 can be rotated with respect to. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the movable part main body 3310 includes a light-transmitting character base 3320, a body part 3321 attached to the front side of the character base 3320, and a body part 3321. A face portion 3322 attached to the upper attachment portion 3321b from the front side, and a light emitting substrate 3323 arranged on the rear side of the character base 3320 to irradiate the character base 3320 with light from the rear, are provided. The portion 3322 can be decorated with light emission.

  A bearing portion 3320a that protrudes forward and is inserted into the opening 3321a of the trunk portion 3321 is provided on the front right side of the character base 3320, and a central bush 3326 is fitted into the bearing portion 3320a from the front side. An upper sliding portion 3320b having an L-shaped vertical cross section is formed at the upper end of the character base 3320, and the upper sliding portion 3320b is a guide formed on the back surface of an upper cover 3345 (see FIG. 159) described later. The protrusion 3320d protruding rearward from the upper sliding portion 3320b is inserted into a guide groove 3301e (see FIG. 159) formed in the upper portion of the base member 3301. Thus, the upper end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide groove 3301e. Note that a plate-like slide rib 3324 is attached to the rear surface of the upper sliding portion 3320b, and stable sliding is possible by contacting the wall surface 3301b around the guide groove 3301e.

  In addition, a lower sliding portion 3320c having an L-shaped cross section is formed at the lower end of the character base 3320, and is hooked by a guide portion (not shown) formed on the back surface of the lower cover 3305 (see FIG. 154). And a pair of bushes 3325 respectively connected to both ends of the rear surface of the lower sliding portion 3320c are inserted into two guide grooves 3301i and 3301h (see FIG. 159) formed in the lower portion of the base member 3301. The lower end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h. In the base member 3301, the partition wall 3301j forming the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h protrudes forward, and the panel presser 3327 attached to the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower sliding portion 3320c is the lower surface of the partition wall 3301j. Slidable contact with each other enables stable sliding.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 158, the movable arm portion 3311 includes an arm ornament 3330, a light-transmitting lens portion 3331 disposed on the rear side thereof, and a light emitting substrate 3332 that irradiates the lens portion 3331 with light from behind. It is composed of The arm ornament 3330 is provided with two window portions 3330a, and a light emitting portion 3331b formed on the lens portion 3331 is inserted from the rear side. Further, the rear surface of the lens portion 3331 corresponding to the bearing portion 3320a is formed with two protruding portions 3331b protruding rearward, and these protruding portions 3331b are stoppers disposed on the rear side of the movable portion main body 3310. The member 3313 is inserted into the through hole 3313 a and connected to the bush 3314. That is, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable arm portion 3311 is supported by the stop member 3313, and the two bushes 3314 protrude rearward from the back surface of the stop member 3313.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 159, the drive mechanism 3303 is provided on a rotating shaft 3340 a of a motor 3340 attached to the upper rear surface of the base member 3301 and a through hole 3301 f formed in the base member 3301. A motor gear 3341 connected from the front side of the base member 3301 and a movable link 3342 connected to a rotary shaft portion 3301g formed on the base member 3301 via a bush 3343 and supported so as to be rotatable about the rotary shaft portion 3301g. And a photosensor 3346 for detecting that the rotational position of the movable link 3342 has reached the origin position.

  The movable link 3342 extends from the center hole 3342b in the centrifugal direction, a center hole 3342b fitted around the bush 3343, a gear portion 3342c formed on an arc centered on the center hole 3342b and meshed with the motor gear 3341. In addition, an arm 3342a whose tip is curved downward, and a connecting portion 3342d connected to a pair of bushes 3314 (see FIG. 155) formed at the tip of the arm 3342a and protruding from the back surface of the movable arm 3311 are provided. .

  According to this, when the rotational force of the motor 3340 is transmitted to the movable link 3342 via the motor gear 3341, the movable link 3342 rotates around the center hole 3342b, and the state shown in FIG. The state changes to that shown in FIG. At this time, the pair of bushes 3314 slides in the linear guide groove 3342e formed in the connecting portion 3342d, and the inclination of the guide groove 3342e changes as the movable link 3342 rotates in the clockwise direction. For this reason, the movable arm portion 3311 rotates in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, the movable portion main body 3310 slides along the arc-shaped guide grooves 3301e on the upper end side and slides along the arc-shaped guide grooves 3301i and 3301h on the upper end side, so as shown in FIG. As the center of rotation is located below the accessory unit 3300, the upper unit varies greatly. For this reason, the movable decorative body 3302 performs the action of pushing the body forward while raising the fist to the height of the shoulder like a guts pose, greatly enhancing the character's dynamic feeling and presence, It can enhance interest. In particular, since such a movement is performed by one movable link 3342, the configuration of the drive mechanism 3303 can be simple and inexpensive.

  A pair of stoppers 3345a are provided on the front surface of the upper cover 3345, and the rotation range of the movable link 3342 is restricted by contacting the arm 3342a of the movable link 3342. In addition, a spacer 3344 is provided on the rear side of the arm 3342a, and the interval between the arm 3342a and the base member 3301 is kept constant.

  Next, the logo display unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 160, the logo display unit 3400 is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, and is disposed below the upper accessory unit 3100 (see FIG. 135). The logo display unit 3400 has a plurality of three-dimensionally shaped character parts (first character part 3400a to sixth character part 3400f), and a logo indicating the model name, title name, and the like is displayed. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the logo display unit 3400 includes a first character portion 3400a, a second character portion 3400b, a third character portion 3400c, a fourth character portion 3400d, and a fifth character in order from the left side. A horizontally long logo decoration portion 3401 having a portion 3400e and a sixth character portion 3400f is provided. The logo decoration part 3401 is arranged so as to protrude toward the player side, and as shown in FIG. 160 (a), by looking up the logo decoration part 3401 from below, the amount of protrusion of the logo decoration part 3401 can be grasped. Is possible. Here, the logo display unit 3400 corresponds to the character-shaped decorative body of the present invention, and the logo decorative portion 3401 corresponds to the character decorative portion of the present invention.

  By the way, it is difficult to give a three-dimensional impression even if it is configured so that the front surface protrudes to the player side in the case where the entire front surface is formed flat like a well-known character-shaped decorative body, As a result, it was not possible to make a big impact on the player. In addition, the character part displayed by the character decoration is designed like a logo, and when adjacent characters are close to each other, the separation between the character parts becomes unclear, It was difficult to accurately grasp the appearance of the characters.

  On the other hand, in the logo display unit 3400 of this example, the forward protrusion amount (projection amount) of the logo decoration portion 3401 is different for each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f. For this reason, the logo decoration part 3401 can be captured three-dimensionally for each of the character parts 3400a to 3400f, and the three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration part 3401 can be enhanced. Further, since the front face of the logo decoration portion 3401 is formed in a staircase shape, the separation of the character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes clear, and the appearance of each character portion 3400a to 3400f can be accurately grasped. It becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to arouse an image in which the character portion 3400a on the left end side starts at the head and the character portion pops out to the player side, and the impact given to the player by powerful decoration can be increased.

  In the logo decoration portion 3401, an overlapping portion 3400w (see FIG. 161) is provided between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f, and a part of each character portion 3400a to 3400f overlaps in the front-rear direction. Yes. For this reason, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged in a lump shape, and the sense of unity can be enhanced. Further, in the overlapping portion 3400w, the character portion with the larger protrusion amount (the character portion on the left side) is extended, so which of the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f protrudes toward the player side. Can be grasped from the front shapes of the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f.

  Further, the logo decoration portion 3401 has not only the forward protrusion amount but also the size (front surface area) of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and the front surface gradually increases from the right end side to the left end side. It is formed to be large. That is, the size of the character increases as the character portion projects to the player side. For this reason, it is possible to generate a sense of perspective by the size of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and to make the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f feel larger than actual, and to further enhance the three-dimensional impression. .

  Further, the protruding amount of the logo decoration portion 3401 is the smallest at the sixth character portion 3400f corresponding to the last character and the largest at the first character portion 3400a corresponding to the first character. In other words, among the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f, the character portion that attracts the player's attention most, that is, the most prominent first character portion 3400a is the first character. Therefore, the player can naturally understand a character language (model name, title name, etc.) composed of a series of characters by visually checking each character portion 3400a-3400f in the order in which attention is drawn. Become.

  By the way, in the case where the logo display unit 3400 is arranged on the rear side of the center accessory 2400 as described above, the logo decoration portion 3401 is made visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400. The overall size is the size that can be accommodated in the opening window 2400a when viewed from the player side. Therefore, even if the amount of protrusion is changed between the character portions 3400a to 3400f, there is a risk of lack of force because the protrusion to the player side is insufficient. In particular, when the number of character portions 3400a to 3400f included in the logo decoration portion 3401 is relatively large, the size of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f is reduced, which is unsatisfactory.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 160, a logo front ornament 2420 (described above based on FIG. 130) is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the center accessory 2400. It is disposed adjacent to the left end side of the portion 3401. A single character language (model name, title name, etc.) is formed by combining the logo front decoration 2420 and a series of character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401. Therefore, it is possible to display the character language by protruding the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, and it is possible to further enhance the stereoscopic effect and the force.

  As described above, the center accessory 2400 is provided with the upper right decorative unit 2413, and the right end side of the logo decorative portion 3401 is located behind the upper right decorative unit 2413. For this reason, the right end side of the logo decoration part 3401 can give the impression arrange | positioned more back, and, as a result, the extent of the logo front decoration 2420 can be shown relatively large. Here, the upper right decorative unit 2413 corresponds to the decorative member of the present invention.

  In particular, since the protruding amount of the upper right decorative unit 2413 is substantially equal to the protruding amount of the logo front ornament 2420, the portion having the smallest protruding amount between the sixth character portion 3400f on the one end side and the upper right decorative unit 2413. Therefore, the depth of the sixth character portion 3400f can be greatly increased by rapidly changing to a portion having the largest protrusion amount.

  Further, as described above, since the logo lens 2432 that imitates the character is also provided in the upper right decoration unit 2413, the plurality of character parts 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration part 3401 are associated with the upper right decoration unit 2413. The impression that these are comprised with one unit can be given. Therefore, the step between the sixth character portion 3400f and the upper right decorative unit 2413 can be emphasized, and the overall stereoscopic effect can be further enhanced. Here, the logo lens 2432 corresponds to the decorative character portion of the present invention.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 110, an upper accessory unit 3100 that is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 is provided on the upper side of the logo display unit 3400. Thus, a dynamic feeling can be given to the logo display unit 3400, and more powerful decoration can be performed. In addition, a three-dimensional effect can be generated in the upper accessory unit 3100 and its effect area by the three-dimensionally shaped logo decoration portion 3401. Here, the upper accessory unit 3100 corresponds to the movable decorative body of the present invention.

  In particular, the upper accessory unit 3100 includes a plurality of decorative parts having the same or similar appearance (specifically, a large-side light-emitting rotating part 3120, a small-side light-emitting rotating part 3121, and a rotating body decorative body shown in FIG. 137). 3162) is arranged along the direction in which the character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the upper accessory unit 3100 and the logo display unit 3400 and to give a great impact. Further, the larger the protruding amount of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401, the smaller the size of the upper decoration portion (large-side light emission rotation portion 3120, small-side light emission rotation portion 3121, rotation body decoration body 3162). Therefore, even if the sizes of the character portions 3400a to 3400f (the size of the front surface) are all equal, the first character portion 3400a on the left end side can be seen to be relatively large by being visually recognized together with these decorative portions. As a result, the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be felt larger than it actually is.

  By the way, when arranging a plurality of decorative parts (large side light emitting rotating part 3120, small side light emitting rotating part 3121, and rotating body decorative body 3162) having different sizes in this way, the respective centers are aligned in the left-right direction. In the case of the arrangement, the smaller the decorative portion (rotating body decorative body 3162), the smaller the forward protrusion amount. In other words, the amount of protrusion of the plurality of decorative portions gradually decreases from the right end side to the left end side, which is opposite to the shape of the logo decorative portion 3401 (that is, the shape in which the amount of forward protrusion gradually increases). It becomes the form. Therefore, according to this, the sense of unity between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper accessory unit 3100 may be lost.

  On the other hand, the decorative portions (large-side light emitting rotating portion 3120, small-side light emitting rotating portion 3121, and rotating body decorative body 3162) of this example are arranged so that the positions of the front ends in the front-rear direction are equal to each other, that is, aligned at the front ends. Therefore, there is no sense of incongruity between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper accessory unit 3100, and it can be recognized as an integral unit.

  Moreover, in each decoration part (large side light emission rotation part 3120, small side light emission rotation part 3121, rotary body decoration body 3162), as mentioned above, a cover member (specifically, the large side shown in FIG. 139 etc.) Since the cover member 3122, the small cover member 3123, and the cover member 3172) rotate, it is possible to make the depth of the logo display unit 3400 look very large. In particular, a cover member (large side cover member 3122, small side cover member 3123, cover member 3172) is provided behind the decorative body (large side light emitting rotating unit 3120, small side light emitting rotating unit 3121, rotating body decorative body 3162). Since the surrounding members 3113 and 3180 are disposed from the rear side, the space behind the decorative portion (large-side light emitting rotating portion 3120, small-side light emitting rotating portion 3121 and rotating body decorative body 3162) is visually recognized as a production space. As a result, the depth in the depth direction can be impressed on the logo decoration portion 3401 of the logo display unit 3400 arranged on the lower side.

  Furthermore, since the logo display unit 3400 of this example is disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the three-dimensional logo decoration portion 3401 It is visually recognized by overlapping in the direction. Therefore, the logo decoration part 3401 can be made conspicuous, and the three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration part 3401 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 162, the logo display unit 3400 of this example is disposed behind the logo decoration unit 3401 with the light diffusion sheet 3403 disposed on the rear side of the logo decoration unit 3401 and the light diffusion sheet 3403 interposed therebetween. And a left light emitting substrate 3405 and a right light emitting substrate 3406 that irradiate light from behind to the light diffusion sheet 3403 through the sheet retainer 3404. In addition, a horizontally long rectangular upper window 3401b penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided on the upper right side of the logo decoration portion 3401, and a lens-shaped logo portion 3402 is fitted from the front. Here, the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406 correspond to the light emitting means of the present invention.

  Further, the sheet presser 3404 includes a character frame portion 3404a corresponding to the logo decoration portion 3401, a window frame shape portion 3404b corresponding to the upper window 3401b, and a support portion 3404c corresponding to the upper left decoration unit 2411 (see FIG. 130). The light emitted from the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406 is efficiently applied to the rear surface of the light diffusion sheet 3403, the lens-shaped logo portion 3402, and the light diffusion sheet 2421 (see FIG. 130). It has become so. As described above, the logo decoration unit 3401 is decorated with light emitted from the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406, so that the logo display unit 3400 can be made more conspicuous. In particular, since light is diffused by the light diffusing sheet 3403, each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be shined without any spots, and although it is a flat surface, it appears that there is a step due to the brightness of the light. It can prevent that the level | step difference between adjacent character part 3400a-3400f will become relatively inconspicuous.

  In particular, in the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406, a plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f can be caused to emit light separately by controlling a plurality of light emitting sources (LEDs) separately. For this reason, the division of each character part 3400a-3400f becomes clearer, and it becomes possible to attract a player's attention. In particular, the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f can be lit in order from the first character portion 3400a on the left end side toward the sixth character portion 3400f on the right end side. According to this, each character portion 3400a to 3400f can be lit. The order in which 3400f should be grasped (that is, the order of reading) is further clarified, and it is possible to reliably impress the player with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the like.

  Next, the back shelf decoration unit 3502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the back shelf decoration unit 3502 is arranged behind the transparent rear shelf cover 2404 in the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 129), and can be visually recognized through the rear shelf cover 2404. Yes. The shelf interior decoration unit 3502 includes a base member 3530, an annular large frame portion 3531a attached to the central opening 3530a of the base member 3530, and left and right recessed portions 3530b of the base member 3530 extending outward from the left and right sides. , 3530c, and a decorative frame 3531 composed of a small frame connecting portion 3531b. Further, the back of the shelf decoration unit 3502 is fitted into the jewel-shaped decoration portion 3532 fitted into the large frame portion 3531a from the rear side of the decoration frame 3531 and the small frame connecting portion 3531b, and performs display according to the number of times the big hit lottery is held. The left retaining lens 3534 and the right retaining lens 3535, the diffusion lens 3533 disposed on the rear side of the jewel-shaped decoration portion 3532, and the rear surface of the base member 3530. A light emitting substrate 3536 for irradiating light to the lens 3534 and the right holding lens 3535 is provided. Note that a reflector 3537 is disposed between the light emitting substrate 3536 and the recess 3530b of the base member 3530, so that light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3536 can be efficiently irradiated to the left holding lens 3534. ing.

  The upper accessory unit 3100, the left accessory unit 3200, the right accessory unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, and the back shelf decoration unit 3502 housed in the back box 3001 have been described in detail above. FIG. As described above, a ball guiding unit 3501 is further accommodated in the lower part of the back box 3001, and a left relay board 3508 is accommodated on the upper left side of the back box 3001. A display unit 3511 including a lower relay substrate 3509, a right relay substrate 3510, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed on the rear surface of the back box 3001. Hereinafter, these configurations will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the ball guiding unit 3501 includes a left winning portion 3520 and a right guiding portion 3521 for guiding a winning game ball to the general winning holes 2105 and 2106 (see FIG. 115), the first starting opening 2101 and the like. Have. The left guiding unit 3520 and the right guiding unit 3521 include a general winning port sensor 3522 for detecting a game ball won in the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 and a first detecting ball for the first starting port 2101. A start port sensor 3524 is provided. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 3523 is also provided in the left guide portion 3520 and the right guide portion 3521, and an illegal game using a magnet or the like can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 164, around the sphere guiding unit 3501, three light emitting substrates, that is, a left light emitting substrate 3503, a lower light emitting substrate 3506, and a right light emitting substrate 3507 are arranged. These light-emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 irradiate the winning device unit 2100 (FIG. 115) disposed in the front with light so that the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g of the base member 2110 (FIG. 119) are illuminated. It is something to be made. Although details will be described later, the left relay board 3508, the right relay board 3510, and the lower relay board 3509 relay a drive signal of a motor or the like provided in the back unit 3000.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the display unit 3511 has a liquid crystal display device 1900 that can be seen through the opening 3001 c of the back box 3001, and a protective plate 3540 is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Yes. In addition, attachment members 3542 are provided on the left and right side surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 1900, are detachably attached to the back surface of the back box 3001, and are fixed by a lock member 3512. In addition, a liquid crystal back cover 3544 having a liquid crystal power supply substrate 3545 is disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a peripheral control substrate 4010 accommodated in the substrate cover 3547 is disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal back cover 3544. A control board set plate 3546 is mounted. A harness cover 3549 is also attached to the substrate cover 3547.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3524 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2166, and detection signals from some of the general winning opening sensors 3522 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or attached to the gate sensor 2176, the general winning opening sensor 3522, the count sensor 2160, and the back unit 3000, respectively. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3523 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that each solenoid 2128, 2141, 2156 via the panel relay board 3012. A first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, and a first special symbol memory via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, the gate sensor 2176, and the count sensor 2160 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensor 3522 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2107, so the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2176 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3524, the second start port sensor 2166, and the gate sensor 2176. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the winning ball opening 2153 is opened and game balls frequently enter, and therefore, the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2160 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2160. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3522 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2105 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3522.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 169) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout and the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and also sends the ball by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. The CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. By stopping the output, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 4170, or the gaming board Game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in 4, color LEDs of each decoration board provided in the game board 4, etc. Game board side drive light emission data composed of a game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal to the game board decoration drive board A transmission signal is transmitted from the serial I / O port to each relay board 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, or a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. Door-side drive data for output, and door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5. Door side drive light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, or to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit, the sound ROM 4140 Control signal for extracting the sound information from the (sound command) and outputs to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are transmitted to the periphery via relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. It is input to the control MPU 4140a. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow, and is provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive command, movable body drive command, This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 send a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. Are output to the LEDs such as the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. Or output to LEDs such as the respective light emitting substrates 3115 provided in the panel 4. The relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 are provided with a drive signal on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received movable body drive command. Output to the dial drive motor 414 and each drive motor 3127 provided in the game board 4. In particular, in this example, as described above, the movable decorative body 3202 is moved between the standby position and the effect position with respect to the left accessory unit 3200, and also when the movable decorative object 3202 is in the standby position, the effect position Also at this time, the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 are output so as to emit light. In addition, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the effect position, or when moving from the effect position to the standby position, the light emission of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is temporarily stopped. Output. In addition, about the 3rd light emission part 3222 arrange | positioned in the constantly exposed site | part of the movable decoration body 3202, it outputs so that light emission of the 3rd light emission part 3222 may be prohibited when the movable decoration body 3202 is a standby position.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via each relay board 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and connects the relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5, or from the speakers 821 of the main body frame 3 via the relay boards 3508, 3509 and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 168, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and reach effects described later. Displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various video data and various data used for display of the decorative design, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above. A character ROM 4150d for storing various data on the screen and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied are provided.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control is in progress. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an execution signal indicating that to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3-5. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. Note that the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851 although not shown.

[3-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the island facility. When the power switch 852 is operated, the power supplied from the island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectification circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectification circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification of AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 851b. This power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c smoothes + 37V by removing the input + 37V ripple, and + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

  The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates a direct current + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V creation circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. Note that AC24V supplied from the island facility is also supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  The power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source of a RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. This is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  As described later, + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, the electric power from the + 5.2V generating circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, and is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. A current flows in the direction.

  In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 back to the power supply board 851. 2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control MPU4111a does not operate, but the stored contents are retained by applying the payoff VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e that is forward by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 from the supply control board 4110 and the supply control board 4110 again from + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied and charging is possible. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. It has come to be.

[3-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  Three types of voltages + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 4100 is also supplied. In addition, four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and the peripheral control board is provided via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 170 (a), four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three kinds of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp driving circuits 4161 of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Various signals such as signals and gradation lighting signals are output, and the four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4162 of each relay board 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 to drive the drive source. A drive signal is output from the circuit 4162 to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4. Of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24 V and +37 V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is controlled for drawing, and a backlight power source that is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a, and + 37V is a backlight. Power is being supplied. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the door frame base board 194. Of these three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). In addition to the three types of voltages, the door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including +9 V generated by the +9 V generation circuit 194 a to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5.

[3-5C. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4111a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 170 (a) and 170 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4010. The backlight power supply 1900b is transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194, and various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 are passed through the door frame base substrate 194. Etc. are to be transmitted.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4111 It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the launch power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply substrate 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[3-5D. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100f and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g and the like, for example.

[3-5E. Voltage supplied to launch power board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the launch power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create a direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) to drive the firing solenoid of the launch control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. This is supplied to the circuit 4120d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “−terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded, while the plus terminal (hereinafter referred to as “positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the dispensing control board 4110. It has become. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[3-6. Driving solenoid drive method]
Next, a method for driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit for a firing solenoid, FIG. 172 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 173 is a diagram showing characteristics of the DC / DC converter. FIG. 174 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG.

[3-6A. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 171, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 is mainly composed of a firing control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a firing timing circuit 4120c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball in the dispensing control board 4110. The feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c are configured.

  When the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the launch control input circuit 4120a receives power (AC24V) from the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110. Is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a CR connection signal, and a detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle is input. When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, which is output as a touch detection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c and detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will, is input. The stop detection signal is output to the launch timing circuit 4120c.

  The launch timing circuit 4120c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4120c has a first state that the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Case, touch detection signal is the second case that the palm or finger is not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the firing stop detection signal tells that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped Among the third cases, when one of the cases is applicable, the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited, while when not all of the cases, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted.

  The firing timing circuit 4120c is input with the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b. When the launching solenoid 654 is permitted to launch a game ball, 100 game balls per minute are played based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feed reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). It outputs to the feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplifier circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851. The direct current + 2.5V stabilized from this + 5.2V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter “ + 2.5V ”) and is supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal that is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal that is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 are electrically connected to + 5.2V via the resistor PR2, and the resistor PR2 connects to the REF terminal. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC0 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC0 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 171, the amplifier circuit 4121 b amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121 a by a factor of 2 to create DC +5.0 V (DC +5.0 V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.0 V”). Then, it is supplied to the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the amplifier circuit 4121b mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC1. The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, and the operational amplifier PIC1. One end of the inverting input terminal (− terminal) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR3 whose ground is grounded, and the other end of the resistor PR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. And are electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. The rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 is supplied via the device relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC2 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, and one fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4121b, and the other fixed terminal at both ends is the handle. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded. From the variable terminal which is a terminal different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotational position detection sensor 512, it is possible to take out the divided voltage of the voltage applied to both ends according to the variable resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected to resistances PR5 and PR6 (described later) in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880. 172 (b)), and the divided voltage of the resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 as described above. The ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3 (the capacitor PC3 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid of the dispensing control board 4110 The voltage is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage outputs the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by a factor of 1, that is, as it is as a voltage on the order of volts. The first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, but outputs the voltage to the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. Therefore, circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the first stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC4 grounded to the ground.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (− terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is a non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage is a voltage in the order of volts because it simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage of the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, the voltage in the millivolt order is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. To do. The operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage that the resistor PR6 in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, directly outputs, but the resistance in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. Circuit separation is realized between a rear-stage input side circuit for applying a voltage that the PR6 takes on and a rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input side circuit to the rear stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the rear stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 flows through the resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded, so that the voltage in the millivolt order that the resistor PR1 takes is used as a firing control voltage. 4121c. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is also applied with the firing intensity target voltage, which is the voltage in the millivolt order described above. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are, as described above, the resistance from the voltage on the order of volts to the voltage on the order of millivolts on the payout control board 4110 (launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d). The voltage is stepped down by the voltages that PR1 and PR6 handle. That is, since it is applied through a wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage on the order of millivolts. Can be compared with each other, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launching device 650 and between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via the wiring. Since the wiring is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by setting the voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage with the firing strength target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is greater than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”). Thus, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4121d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c each time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input. A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC <b> 0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input while flowing to the firing solenoid 654, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. In other words, the switching circuit 4121d receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. If the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L and OFF A signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. By this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing strength target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit As described above, 4121d supplies the firing solenoid 654 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, the switching circuit 4121d performs control to cause the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to self-oscillate and flow the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a “self-oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing intensity target voltage. Thereby, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is at the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The applied voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to the switching circuit 4121d, the switching circuit 4121d combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The merged current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is at least over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current commensurate with the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). When the merged current) flows to the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 reaches the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 even if the game ball can jump over the firing rail 660. Therefore, the foul balls are collected by the foul cover unit 540. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been launched are collected as foul balls. Thereby, since it can prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, the firing solenoid 654 is prevented from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and to prevent failure.

  In this embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a + 2.5V. Is amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b and is divided by the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the rotational position of the front part 506 of the rotary handle body is the same as that of the divided voltage. When held at the position, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

  In addition, the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are ground and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, the temperature in the island facility is extremely high due to heat generated by polishing of the game balls, heat generated by collision and friction between the game balls, and heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations. In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko facility. It can be output. As a result, since the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to temperature is suppressed, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the minute voltage. In other words, when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle is the same rotational position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that “unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[3-6B. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 173 with respect to the input current at the point TA and the output current and output voltage at the point TB shown in FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, as shown in FIG. 173 (a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C where the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases from 400 mA to 660 mA by approximately 260 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from 1 to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. Note that, in the vicinity of +5 V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. It has become a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin begins to become smaller than the output current Iout, The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a launch intensity that reaches the game area 1100. In section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 320 mA to 260 mA by about 60 mA, compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, while the input current Iin is decreased by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotating handle main body front 506 is not rotated is touched 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Thus, the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is that the game ball that has already jumped to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning ports. For this reason, the range of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a that can be taken when the player turns the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a milliampere order current.

[3-6C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a fixed rotational position in front of the rotary handle body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 171 and the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is a firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c allows the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60000 ms, are directed toward the game area 1100. Since it is set so as to be ejected, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), its pulse width is 30 ms and its period T is 600 ms.

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle body front 506 to reach the limit rotational position, the DC / DC in the original rotational position not rotated. A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  174 (b) and (c) when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle 506 is in the limit rotational position. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped after 30 ms has elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). When the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as shown in FIG. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is equal to the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the firing handle front pulse 506 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the original rotational position, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is supplied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. Then, after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, when 30 ms elapses and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). When the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is output from the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA that is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even when the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a adopts a control method in which a current flows through the firing solenoid 654 alone in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, since the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven, a large current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases with this period T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components, decorations used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 without the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The amperage-order current supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is inputted until the next firing reference pulse T0 is inputted. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the “first current” in the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic When the power supply SC0 is charged with the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the “second current” in the milliampere order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851. it can. As a result, the amperage order of the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The current is supplied from the DC power source of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the “first current” and “second current” in the order of milliamperes supplied. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent on designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[3-6D. Relationship between firing reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 171 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

  The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms which is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, as shown in FIGS. Input to the circuit 4120e (when timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the next set of game balls to be launched can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. Each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. It can be launched continuously toward.

  As described above, in this example, after the game ball is driven by the firing solenoid 654, the driving power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, and the electrolytic power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Therefore, the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 can be changed by exchanging the firing power supply substrate 831 having the electrolytic capacitors SC0 having different capacities, and the driving characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 can be changed. The characteristics can be changed to match the board 4.

  In addition, since power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, the power from the power supply board 851 is stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and fired between the time the game ball is launched and the next time it is launched. By supplying the power to the solenoid 654, it is possible to avoid instantaneously consuming a large current directly from the power supply board 851, and light emission and movement of the LED of the light emitting decoration board, the motor for driving the effect, the solenoid, etc. It is possible to prevent instability and occurrence of unevenness of the game ball.

  Further, the power supply board 851 creates and supplies DC power (+ 5.2V, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V) from the AC power (AC24V) of the island facility, and the hitting ball launcher 650 has a handle. The front of the rotary handle main body 506 of the device 500 is rotated, and the shooting solenoid 654 can be driven with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  The firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, is amplified by the amplification circuit 4121b, and + 5.0V is the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506 is held at the same rotational position, the divided voltage is maintained at a constant voltage without fluctuation. Become. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

  FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the liquid crystal control board 4150. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like (not shown). When the display command described above is received from the peripheral control board 4010, the detailed description thereof will be described later. Based on the command, the VDP 4150c and the image division module 4150f are controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4010 as described above.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores, in addition to various programs for generating an image (screen) to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like. ing. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of images (screens) to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. Alternatively, the schedule data may be a set of commands (commands interpreted by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a) that generate such screen data. As the format of the screen data, any format that represents an image can be adopted. For example, the screen data includes gradation value data representing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (for example, data representing R (red), G (green), and B (blue) gradation values of each pixel). Also good. Instead of this, the screen data may include a drawing command for drawing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. As a drawing command, any command that can be analyzed by the VDP 4150c can be adopted. Further, the screen data may include both gradation value data and a drawing command. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is a time series of non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred to a predetermined area of the character RAM 4150e (referred to as “non-resident area”). It is arranged and configured. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data relating to an image (screen) drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. Such data transfer may be executed by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, or may be executed by the VDP 4150c instead. The VDP 4150c may perform data transfer in accordance with an instruction from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. In any case, any timing can be adopted as the data transfer timing. This timing may be determined by schedule data.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a display command from the peripheral control board 4010, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c. Note that the schedule data may include a command for causing the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to generate screen data instead of the screen data itself supplied to the VDP 4150c. In this case, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a may analyze the schedule data, generate screen data, and supply the generated screen data to the VDP 4150c. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a may execute screen data generation and supply in the order of time series determined by the schedule data.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a may correct the schedule data in accordance with an instruction (for example, a command) from the peripheral control board 4010. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a may newly generate schedule data in accordance with an instruction from the peripheral control board 4010.

  The VDP 4150c is a drawing circuit that can output drive signals (for example, RGB gradation value signals and synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization, vertical synchronization, clock, data enable, etc.)) for driving the LCD driver. As the VDP 4150c, a general-purpose VDP configured to drive a single display panel (LCD driver) is employed. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display device 1400 of this embodiment has two display panels 1400a and 1400b. Therefore, in this embodiment, one VDP 4150c processes data for two display panels (generates image data), and the image division module 4150f uses the drive signal from the VDP 4150c to generate the first display panel. A signal for 1400a and a signal for the second display panel 1400b are output. Hereinafter, the first display panel 1400a is also referred to as “first panel LCD1”, and the second display panel 1400b is also referred to as “second panel LCD2”. Details of processing for data division (data selection) will be described later. First, general drawing processing of the VDP 4150c and an outline of operation of the image division module 4150f will be described.

  Based on the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c generates data representing an image displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 (also referred to as “image data”. For example, data representing the RGB gradation value of each pixel). . When screen data is input by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c generates image data based on the input screen data, and supplies the generated image data to the image division module 4150f. When the screen data requests drawing of a sprite image such as a character, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data described later from the character RAM 4150e to generate image data. Note that the “frame buffer method” is adopted as the buffer method of the VDP 4150c. The VDP 4150c generates and outputs image data using a memory (frame buffer) that temporarily stores image data (frame data) for one screen. As the buffer method, any other method (for example, “line buffer method”) may be adopted. In this “line buffer method”, image data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b) is held in the line buffer, and held in this line buffer. This is a method of outputting image data for one line. In either case, two buffers, a drawing buffer and a display buffer, may be used as buffers. The capacity of one buffer may be one line (one frame) or more.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the drawing speed on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b. Will be. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b. For example, when various persons are displayed on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. The position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) are set by the above-described schedule data (screen data).

  Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called “character data”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The VDP 4150c supplies a drive signal representing the generated image data to the image division module 4150f instead of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The image division module 4150f divides the image data supplied from the VDP 4150c into data for the first display panel 1400a and data for the second display panel 1400b. The image division module 4150f supplies data for the first display panel 1400a to the first LVDS transmitter 4150h, and supplies data for the second display panel 1400b to the second LVDS transmitter 4150i. These LVDS transmitters 4150h and 4150i convert the received data into signals in the LVDS format. The first LVDS transmitter 4150h supplies the converted signal (LVDS format signal) to the first display panel 1400a, and the second LVDS transmitter 4150i supplies the converted signal (LVDS format signal) to the second display panel 1400b. Note that the resolution (pixel density) of the display panels 1400a and 1400b may be higher than the resolution (pixel density) of the image represented by the signals from the LVDS transmitters 4150h and 4150i. In this case, scalers 4150j and 4150k that increase the resolution (pixel density) may be provided behind the LVDS transmitters 4150h and 4150i. In this embodiment, the resolutions of the signals from the LVDS transmitters 4150h and 4150i are the same as the resolutions of the display panels 1400a and 1400b, so the scalers 4150j and 4150k are omitted.

  The first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b each have 1024 pixels in the left-right direction and 768 pixels (XGA size) in the up-down direction, and are arranged along a line from the left to the right of each display panel. It is driven by main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in the direction and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing main scanning in a direction crossing one direction. When one line of image data output from the liquid crystal control board 4150 is input to the LCD driver of the display panel (each of the LCD driver of the first display panel 1400a and the LCD driver of the second display panel 1400b), each LCD Based on the image data for one line, the driver sequentially displays the display state on the pixels for one line sequentially from left to right of the display panel (first display panel 1400a or second display panel 1400b) as main scanning. Set (Color). When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the image data for the next line is input, the display panel is used as the main scan based on the image data for the next line. In order from left to right, display states (colors) are set for pixels for one line.

  FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram showing a detailed configuration of the VDP 4150c and the image division module 4150f. The VDP 4150c includes a drawing engine 4150ca, a memory 4150cb, an output processing unit 4150cc, a data transfer unit 4150cd, a bus interface 4150ce, a CPU interface 4150cf having a register 4150cg, and buses 4150ch and 4150ci. A drawing engine 4150ca, a memory 4150cb, and an output processing unit 4150cc are connected to the first bus 4150ch. A drawing engine 4150ca, a data transfer unit 4150cd, and a CPU interface 4150cf are connected to the second bus 4150ci. A bus interface 4150ce is connected to the data transfer unit 4150cd. A character ROM 4150d and a character RAM 4150e are connected to the bus interface 4150ce. A liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is connected to the CPU interface 4150cf. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a can control the operation of the VDP 4150c by writing various values to the register 4150cg. The data transfer unit 4150cd executes data transfer between elements of the VDP 4150c.

  Data (screen data and commands) from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is transmitted to each element of the VDP 4150c via the CPU interface 4150cf. The drawing engine 4150ca analyzes the screen data supplied from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a and generates image data. At this time, the drawing engine 4150ca uses the memory 4150cb as two frame buffers FB1 and FB2 (one is used as a drawing buffer and the other is used as a display buffer). The drawing engine 4150ca has a function of drawing sprites on the generated image. When drawing of a sprite image is requested by screen data, the drawing engine 4150ca acquires sprite data from the character ROM 4150d and the character RAM 4150e via the data transfer unit 4150cd and the bus interface 4150ce. The drawing engine 4150ca draws a sprite image using the acquired sprite data.

  The drawing engine 4150ca supplies the generated image data to the output processing unit 4150cc via the memory 4150cb (the output processing unit 4150cc acquires the image data stored in the memory 4150cb). The output processing unit 4150cc outputs a drive signal that can drive the LCD driver based on the acquired image data. As shown in FIG. 176, in this embodiment, the drive signals are signals R, G, and B each representing an RGB gradation value by 8 bits, a data enable signal DENA, a horizontal synchronization signal Hsync, and a vertical synchronization signal Vsync. And a clock signal NCLK and a field signal FIELD. In the present embodiment, these signals are supplied to the image segmentation module 4150f.

  The signals other than the field signal FIELD are the same as those generally used for driving the display panel (can be called moving image signals representing moving images). Specifically, the horizontal synchronization signal Hsync indicates a line break in the horizontal direction, and the vertical synchronization signal Vsync indicates a frame break. The data enable signal DENA indicates a so-called effective display section (also referred to as an effective area). These signals Hsync, Vsync, DENA, and NCLK correspond to a synchronization signal for each frame image of the moving image output from the VDP 4150c (hereinafter also referred to as “input synchronization signal SSI”). In the present embodiment, these signals R, G, B, DENA, Hsync, Vsync, and FIELD are digital signals that change in synchronization with the clock signal NCLK. The data enable signal DENA indicates a section (time) in which the signals R, G, and B represent valid values. In this embodiment, the field signal FIELD is used for data division (data selection) (details of the FIELD signal will be described later).

  The image division module 4150f includes an input control unit 4150fa, an image signal division logic 4150fb, a register 4150fc, an output control unit 4150fd, a CPU interface 4150fe, and a memory interface 4150ff. An SDRAM 4150g is connected to the memory interface 4150ff, a clock generation unit 4150fg is connected to the output control unit 4150fd, and a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is connected to the CPU interface 4150fe. The register 4150fc can read and write from each element of the image division module 4150f.

  The input control unit 4150fa receives the drive signal from the VDP 4150c and supplies data represented by the received signal to the image signal division logic 4150fb. The image signal division logic 4150fb divides the received data into image data for the first display panel 1400a and image data for the second display panel 1400b (details of the division will be described later). At this time, the image signal division logic 4150fb temporarily stores the acquired image data for the first panel LCD1 and image data for the second panel LCD2 in the SDRAM 4150g (the SDRAM 4150g is used as a frame buffer). . The image signal division logic 4150fb supplies the divided image data to the output control unit 4150fd via the SDRAM 4150g (the output control unit 4150fd acquires the image data stored in the SDRAM 4150g).

  The output control unit 4150fd supplies data for the first display panel 1400a to the first LVDS transmitter 4150h, and supplies data for the second display panel 1400b to the second LVDS transmitter 4150i. Data supplied to the first LVDS transmitter 4150h includes RGB gradation values RO, BO, BO (8 bits per color component in this embodiment), a clock CLKO, a horizontal synchronization HO, and a vertical synchronization VO. , And data enable DEO. These signals RO, GO, BO, CLKO, HO, VO, and DEO are the same as those generally used for driving the display panel (can be called moving image signals representing moving images). The first LVDS transmitter 4150h converts the received data into an LVDS format signal and supplies it to the first display panel 1400a. Hereinafter, the entire signals (signals CLKO, HO, VO, DEO) used for synchronization are also referred to as “first synchronization signal SSO”.

  FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram of the first synchronization signal SSO. In the present embodiment, the output control unit 4150fd (FIG. 176) generates the first synchronization signal SSO based on the parameters recorded in the register 4150fc. FIG. 177 (A) shows some of the parameters recorded in the register 4150fc. As parameters relating to the horizontal direction of the first panel LCD1, a synchronization cycle HC1, a synchronization signal width HW1, an effective area start point HAS1, and an effective area width HAW1 are recorded. As parameters relating to the vertical direction of the first panel LCD1, a synchronization cycle VC1, a synchronization signal width VW1, an effective area start point VAS1, and an effective area width VAW1 are recorded.

FIG. 177B is a timing chart showing an outline of the first synchronization signal SSO (clock signal CLKO, horizontal synchronization signal HO, data enable signal DEO, vertical synchronization signal VO). The output control unit 4150fd (FIG. 176) outputs the clock signal CLKO using the first base clock signal iCLKO received from the clock generation unit 4150fg. For example, the output control unit 4150fd outputs the first clock signal iCLKO as it is as the clock signal CLKO. Further, the output control unit 4150fd may include a frequency conversion unit. The frequency converter may perform frequency conversion (for example, multiplication or division) on the first base clock signal iCLKO to generate a clock signal CLKO suitable for the first panel LCD1. Further, the output control unit 4150fd may include a clock generation unit. Clock generator with variable frequency (for example, PLL (Phase-locked
If the loop) clock generation unit) is employed, the output control unit 4150fd can output a clock signal CLKO suitable for the first panel LCD1. In any case, the output control unit 4150fd outputs a clock signal CLKO suitable for the first panel LCD 1 independently of the clock signal NCLK input from the VDP 4150c.

  The other signals HO, DEO, and VO are all negative logic signals and change in synchronization with the clock signal CLKO. The output control unit 4150fd generates (outputs) these signals based on the parameters recorded in the register 4150fc.

  The horizontal synchronization cycle HC1 indicates the length of one cycle of the horizontal synchronization signal (the unit is the number of clocks), and the horizontal synchronization signal width HW1 indicates the width of one pulse of the horizontal synchronization signal (the unit is the clock). number). One period of horizontal synchronization corresponds to one main scan in the first panel LCD1. The effective horizontal start point HAS1 indicates the time from the pulse of the horizontal synchronization signal to the pulse of the data enable signal DEO (the unit is the number of clocks). The effective horizontal width HAW1 indicates the width of one pulse of the data enable signal DEO (the unit is the number of clocks). The data enable signal DEO is set to “True” only during a period in which valid pixel data (RO, GO, BO) is output. In this embodiment, data for one pixel is output in one clock. Since data for one line (1024 pixels) in the horizontal direction is continuously output, the width of one pulse (HAW1) of the data enable signal DEO is 1024 clocks.

  The vertical synchronization cycle VC1 indicates the length of one cycle of the vertical synchronization signal (unit: number of lines), and the vertical synchronization signal width VW1 indicates the width of one pulse of the vertical synchronization signal (unit: number of lines). ing. The number of lines is expressed by the number of pulses of the horizontal synchronization signal HO (the number of times of change from H level (False) to L level (True)). The effective vertical start point VAS1 indicates the time from the pulse of the vertical synchronization signal to the start of the line (horizontal synchronization signal HO pulse) where valid pixel data (RO, GO, BO) is output (in units). , Number of lines). The effective vertical width VAW1 indicates the number of lines from which effective pixel data is output (the unit is the number of lines). In the present embodiment, effective pixel data is output by continuous lines (main scanning), so the effective vertical width VAW1 is 768 lines. In each of the main scans for 768 lines, the data enable signal DEO is set to True.

  The parameters recorded in the register 4150fc are not limited to the parameters shown in FIG. 177, and the timing relationship among the clock signal CLKO, the horizontal synchronization signal HO, the data enable signal DEO, and the vertical synchronization signal VO is uniquely determined. Any possible parameter can be employed.

  As shown in FIG. 176, the data supplied to the second LVDS transmitter 4150i are similarly RGB gradation values RE, BE, BE, clock CLKE, horizontal synchronization HE, vertical synchronization VE, and data enable. DEE and the respective signals (all of these signals can also be called moving image signals representing moving images). The second LVDS transmitter 4150i converts the received data into an LVDS format signal and supplies it to the second display panel 1400b. Hereinafter, the entire signals (signals CLKE, HE, VE, DEE) used for synchronization are also referred to as “second synchronization signal SSE”. Regarding the second synchronization signal SSE, the same parameter as that of the first synchronization signal SSO is recorded in the register 4150fc (FIG. 177 (A)), and the second base clock signal iCLKE is output-controlled from the clock generation unit 4150fg. Is supplied to the unit 4150fd (FIG. 176). Similarly to the first synchronization signal SSO, the output control unit 4150fd outputs (generates) the second synchronization signal SSE according to the second base clock signal iCLKE and the parameter of the register 4150fc.

  Parameters used for output (generation) of the synchronization signals SSO and SSE are written into the register 4150fc by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a (FIG. 175). When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a executes initialization of the liquid crystal control board 4150 (for example, when the power is turned on), the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a writes parameters to the register 4150fc according to the program stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b. The program is configured in advance so that parameter values suitable for the panels LCD1 and LCD2 are written.

  FIG. 177C is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the parameters HAW1 and VAW1 and the image size SZ1. As shown in the figure, the image size SZ1 (total number of pixels) of the first panel LCD1 is represented by the product of the effective vertical width VAW1 and the effective horizontal width HAW1. The same applies to the image size SZ2 of the second panel LCD2. These image sizes (screen sizes) SZ1 and SZ2 can be used for data division (details will be described later).

  As described above, the output control unit 4150fd outputs two types of synchronization signals SSO and SSE independently of (without synchronizing with) the input synchronization signal SSI supplied from the VDP 4150c. Thus, the synchronization signals SSO and SSE that are actually output from the image division module 4150f to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 are separated from the input synchronization signal SSI that is output from the VDP 4150c that draws an image. Accordingly, the image division module 4150f (output control unit 4150fd) can set the display timings of the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 to appropriate timings independently of the operation timing of the VDP 4150c. As a result, various effect displays using the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2 can be appropriately realized. Further, such advantages can be easily obtained by using the VDP 4150c that is manufactured without assuming that the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2 are driven.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to strictly synchronize the operation timing of the image division module 4150f (for example, the image signal division logic 4150fb or the output control unit 4150fd) and the operation timing of the VDP 4150c, the image division module 4150f uses the VDP 4150c. The division process can be executed independently of the processing timing. As a result, the restriction imposed on the processing for handling the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2 can be reduced, so that various presentation displays using two display panels as described later can be easily realized.

  Input control unit 4150fa includes a portion that receives a signal in synchronization with input synchronization signal SSI from VDP 4150c in order to correctly receive the signal from VDP 4150c. In the present embodiment, the VDP 4150c, the image division module 4150f, and the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 update the frame at a cycle of approximately 60 Hz.

  Further, the liquid crystal control board 4150 controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on a display command from the peripheral control board 4010. Further, as described above, the peripheral control board 4010 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100. In summary, it can be said that the VDP 4150c generates and outputs image data in response to an instruction (command) from the main control board 4100. Thus, the VDP 4150c corresponds to an “image data generation device”. The image division module 4150f corresponds to “selective output means” for outputting image data (at least part of the image data) from the VDP 4150c to the plurality of display panels LCD1 and LCD2. The portion of the output control unit 4150fd that outputs the synchronization signals SSO and SSO corresponds to “synchronization signal output means”, and the image signal division logic 4150fb and the image signal (image data) of the output control unit 4150fd are output. The whole output portion corresponds to “image data output means for selecting (specifying) one of a plurality of image display devices and outputting image data”.

  It can also be said that the liquid crystal control board 4150 controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 in accordance with an instruction (command) from the main control board 4100. It can also be said that the peripheral substrate 4010 controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 in accordance with an instruction (command) from the main control substrate 4100. It can also be said that the peripheral control board 4010 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 in accordance with an instruction from the main control board 4100.

[3-7. Image (data) division]
[3-7A. Time division (2-screen display)]
FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram showing “time division” which is one mode of image (data) division. In this time division, the correspondence between an image and a display panel that displays the image is determined in advance by schedule data. In the figure, the first image data DATA1 to the eighth image data DATA8 are arranged in time series order, and each image data is associated with either the first panel LCD1 or the second panel LCD2. In the example of FIG. 178, the association is determined so that the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 are alternately arranged. Each of the image data DATA1 to DATA8 represents an image displayed on one display panel. The screen data for one sheet supplied from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to the VDP 4150c (FIG. 176) defines the correspondence between the image data for one sheet and the display panel. The VDP 4150c supplies the image data to the image division module 4150f in order one by one. The VDP 4150c notifies the image division module 4150f of the display panel associated with the image data being transferred using the field signal FIELD (details will be described later).

  When the first panel LCD1 is associated with the image data, the image division module 4150f (FIG. 178) sends the signal representing the image data and the first synchronization signal SSO via the first LVDS transmitter 4150h. To the first panel LCD1. When the second panel LCD2 is associated with the image data, the image division module 4150f sends a signal representing the image data and the second synchronization signal SSE to the second panel via the second LVDS transmitter 4150i. It supplies to LCD2. As a result, images are displayed on the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2. The displayed image can change with time.

  FIG. 179 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of processing by time division. In the figure, the states of the following elements are shown. The illustrated elements are the first drawing D1, the second drawing D2, the first frame buffer FB1 (also referred to as the first buffer FB1), the second frame buffer FB2 (also referred to as the second buffer FB2), and the VDP 4150c. An output, a field signal FIELD, an output to the first panel LCD1, and an output to the second panel LCD2.

  The first drawing D1 and the second drawing D2 indicate the states of two series of drawing means realized by the drawing engine 4150ca (FIG. 176). In the present embodiment, the drawing engine 4150ca functions as two drawing means that are distributed in two series and advance drawing processing in parallel. The fact that the first drawing D1 is at the H level indicates that the first drawing means is executing the drawing process, and that the first drawing D1 is at the L level indicates that the first drawing means is at rest. Is shown. The same applies to the second drawing D2. In the present embodiment, the first drawing unit and the second drawing unit execute the drawing process alternately. The time secured for one drawing process by each drawing means is a predetermined constant time (substantially the same as the time of one cycle of vertical synchronization (time for one frame) in the VDP 4150c). The time required for the actual drawing process is sufficiently shorter than this fixed time. The drawing engine 4150ca may function as one means for executing drawing processing without being distributed (this is the same for other embodiments described later).

  In the example of FIG. 179, first, the first drawing means executes drawing processing to create first image data DATA1 (first drawing D1). Next, the second drawing means executes drawing processing to create second image data DATA2 (second drawing D2). At this time, the first drawing means transfers the created first image data DATA1 to the first buffer FB1 (first drawing D1). The first image data DATA1 being created may be stored in the first buffer FB1 (other image data being created may also be stored in the frame buffer).

  Next, the first drawing means creates third data DATA3 (first drawing D1). At this time, the second drawing means stores the second data DATA2 in the second buffer FB2 (second drawing D2). At the same timing, the output processing unit 4150cc (FIG. 176) reads the first image data DATA1 from the first buffer FB1 and supplies it to the image division module 4150f (VDP output). While the first image data DATA1 is being output, the output processing unit 4150cc maintains the field signal FIELD at a level representing an odd number (ODD). The field signal FIELD is a binary (H level and L level) signal, one level indicating an odd number (ODD) and the other level indicating an even number (EVEN). Here, the odd (ODD) level field signal FIELD indicates the first panel LCD1, and the even (EVEN) level field signal FIELD indicates the second panel LCD2. Note that the output processing unit 4150cc identifies the display panel associated with the image data using the screen data received from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Thereafter, the first drawing means and the second drawing means create image data alternately (first drawing D1, second drawing D2). Then, the output processing unit 4150cc outputs the created data in the order of creation. As a result, the field signal FIELD is alternately repeated between the ODD level and the EVEN level.

  On the other hand, the image division module 4150f (FIG. 178) receives the image data DATA1 and DATA2 for the display panels LCD1 and LCD2, respectively, and sends them to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 via the LVDS transmitters 4150h and 4150i. Supply signal. Data for the first panel LCD1 (first image data DATA1) and the first synchronization signal SSO are supplied to the first panel LCD1, and data for the second panel LCD2 (second image) is supplied to the second panel LCD2. Data DATA2) and the second synchronization signal SSE are supplied. The supply of these data (signals) is performed twice (for two frames) continuously.

  Thereafter, the VDP 4150c alternately outputs data (signal) for the first panel LCD1 and data (signal) for the second panel LCD2. The synchronization signals (signals DENA, Hsync, Vsync, and NCLK in FIG. 176) supplied from the VDP 4150c to the image division module 4150f are common between the data for the first panel LCD1 and the data for the second panel LCD2. .

  On the other hand, the image division module 4150f acquires data for the first panel LCD1 over a period of one frame, and acquires data for the second panel LCD2 over a period of one frame, thereby obtaining 2 The data for the first panel LCD1 and the data for the second panel LCD2 are acquired over a period of frames. Then, the image division module 4150f starts supplying the acquired data for each display panel to the respective display panels LCD1 and LCD2 simultaneously (simultaneously), and each display panel LCD1 and LCD2 through a period of two frames. To supply.

  By repeating the above processing, images are displayed on the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2. The displayed image can change with time. Thus, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display images on a plurality of display panels with only one general-purpose VDP.

  As will be described later, as the effect display by the liquid crystal display device 1400, an effect display in which an image is displayed only on the first panel LCD 1 and the entire surface of the second panel LCD 2 is kept white (transparent state) can be employed. is there. Conversely, it is also possible to employ an effect display that displays an image only on the second panel LCD 2 and maintains the entire surface of the first panel LCD 1 in white (transparent state). In the case of realizing such an effect display, schedule data is configured so that image data indicating that the entire surface is white (that is, transparent) is supplied to a display panel that is maintained in a transparent state. That's fine.

  Further, as will be described later, as the effect display by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the image displayed on the first panel LCD1 disposed in front and the image displayed on the second panel LCD2 disposed later are overlapped. An effect display full of a sense of depth can be realized. When realizing such an effect display, it is preferable to maintain synchronization between the image displayed on the first panel LCD 1 and the image displayed on the second panel LCD 2. For example, assuming that an image displayed on the first panel LCD 1 is displayed with a delay of several frames for some reason, images that should not be overlapped do not overlap and images that should not have overlapped are displayed. As a result, the production display is spoiled. Such an image shift between the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2 can occur, for example, when each display panel LCD1 and LCD2 is driven by a separate VDP. When processing delay occurs in one VDP, the image on the display panel driven by the VDP may be delayed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179, the image division module 4150f alternately receives the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2, and the first panel The image data for the LCD 1 and the subsequent received image data for the second panel LCD 2 are handled as data representing two images to be displayed simultaneously (overlapping). For two images to be displayed at the same time, the image division module 4150f (output control unit 4150fd) supplies image data for the first panel LCD1 to the first panel LCD1 at approximately the same timing, and for the second panel LCD2. Are supplied to the second panel LCD 2.

  As described above, the image division module 4150f that alternately receives the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 supplies a drive signal to each of the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2. To do. As a result, even if a problem (for example, processing delay) occurs in the processing in the image division module 4150f, the frame image displayed on one display panel is displayed on the other display panel. Compared with images, the possibility of moving forward or behind can be reduced.

  The image division module 4150f supplies the image data to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 after receiving the image data of the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2, respectively. As described above, the image division module 4150f does not output the image data in a state where reception of only one of the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 to be displayed at the same time is completed. In addition, image data is supplied to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 only after both receptions are completed. As a result, two images that should be displayed in an overlapping manner can be appropriately overlapped and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the VDP 4150c alternately supplies the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 to the image dividing module 4150f. Therefore, even if a problem (for example, processing delay) occurs in the processing in the VDP 4150c, the possibility that image data for one display panel is continuously supplied to the image division module 4150f can be reduced. . As a result, the possibility that the image synchronization between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 is shifted can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the VDP 4150c (drawing engine 4150ca) alternately generates image data for the first panel LCD1 and image data for the second panel LCD2, so that image data for one display panel is generated. Can be greatly reduced. Note that it is preferable to configure schedule data in advance so that the alternate generation (alternate output) of image data by the VDP 4150c is realized. In this way, the configuration of the VDP 4150c can be simplified. In the present embodiment, the VDP 4150c supplies data (field signal FIELD) specifying the display panel associated with the image data to the image division module 4150f, so that the image division module 4150f has an incorrect display panel. The possibility of supplying image data can be reduced. However, the field signal FIELD may be omitted.

[3-7B. Time division (single display)]
FIG. 180 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of processing when an image is displayed only on one of the two panels (for example, the first panel LCD1). In this process, the entire surface of the other panel is kept transparent.

  FIG. 180 shows a timing chart similar to FIG. In the embodiment of FIG. 180, as in the embodiment of FIG. 179, the two drawing means alternately execute the drawing process (first drawing D1 and second drawing D2). Image data DATA1, DATA2, DATA3, DATA4, DATA5,... Are sequentially created by the two drawing means. However, unlike the embodiment of FIG. 179, the first panel LCD 1 is associated with all image data. As the schedule data, any data indicating that there is no image to be displayed on the first panel LCD1 and no image to be displayed on the second panel LCD2 can be adopted. For example, the screen data for the second panel LCD 2 may include data indicating that there is no image to be displayed. Instead, the first panel LCD1 may be associated with all screen data. The time secured for one drawing process by the two drawing means is changed from the time for one frame to the time for two frames (first drawing D1, second drawing D2). The VDP 4150c (output processing unit 4150cc: FIG. 176) outputs the same image data over two consecutive frames (the same image data may be output twice without changing the synchronization signal. The image data may be output only once using the time of 2 frames by reducing the frequency of the image). Field signal FIELD is maintained at the ODD level. As described above, an arbitrary method can be adopted as a method of changing the processing in the VDP 4150c. For example, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a may instruct the VDP 4150c to change processing based on the schedule data. Instead of this, the VDP 4150c may automatically change the process according to the fact that the display panel associated with the image data has not changed.

  Similar to the embodiment of FIG. 179, the image division module 4150f supplies the received image data to the first panel LCD 1 over two frames. As for the first panel LCD1, as in the embodiment of FIG. 179, the image is switched every two frames. On the other hand, for the second panel LCD2, the image division module 4150f does not supply a drive signal. In the present embodiment, as the display panels LCD1 and LCD2, so-called normally white liquid crystal panels are employed. In the present embodiment, when the supply of the drive signal to the second panel LCD 2 is stopped, the application of the voltage to each pixel of the second panel LCD 2 is also stopped. As a result, the entire surface of the second panel LCD 2 becomes transparent.

  As described above, in the embodiment of FIG. 180, the first panel LCD1 displays an image, and the second panel LCD2 is maintained in a transparent state. By such processing, it is possible to realize the same effect display as when one display panel is used. A similar process may be employed when the second panel LCD 2 displays an image and maintains the first panel LCD 1 in a transparent state.

  Note that the method of maintaining the display panel without an image to be displayed in a transparent state is not limited to the method of stopping the drive signal, and any other method can be employed. For example, the image division module 4150f (output control unit 4150fd: FIG. 176) may supply image data representing the entire surface white (transparent) to a display panel having no image to be displayed. Further, the supply of the drive signal may be stopped after the image data representing the entire white is supplied for one frame.

[3-7C. Time-division (from 2-sided display to front-side display)]
FIG. 181 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of a switching process from a state in which images are displayed on the two panels LCD1 and LCD2 to a state in which only the first panel LCD1 displays an image. In this process, the second panel LCD 2 is switched to the transparent state.

  FIG. 181 shows a timing chart similar to FIG. In the example of FIG. 181, the second panel LCD2 is associated only with the second image data DATA2 and the fourth image data DATA4, and the first panel LCD1 is associated with the other image data.

  In the VDP 4150c, for the image data before the fifth image data DATA5, image data for one screen is generated every time for one frame, and for the image data after the sixth image data DATA6, one screen is generated. Image data is generated every two frames (first drawing D1 and second drawing D2). For image data before the third image data DATA3, the output image data is switched every time for one frame, and for image data after the fourth image data DATA4, the output image data is changed. Switching is performed every two frames. When the same image data is output over two consecutive frames, the VDP 4150c (output processing unit 4150cc: FIG. 176) may output the same image data twice without changing the synchronization signal. Alternatively, the frequency of the synchronization signal may be reduced and the image data may be output only once using the time for two frames.

  As the schedule data, any data indicating that the VDP 4150c only needs to operate as described above can be adopted. For example, the schedule data may include command data that instructs such an operation. The command data may be supplied as it is from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to the VDP 4150c and interpreted by the VDP 4150c. Further, the command data may be interpreted by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a may further instruct the VDP 4150c.

  Various processes can be adopted as the process of the image division module 4150f. For example, the image division module 4150f, when the field signal FIELD changes from the ODD level to the EVEN level (or from the EVEN level to the ODD level) in two consecutive frames, as in the embodiments of FIGS. 179 and 180. The image data for two screens received within the time for the two frames may be handled as data representing two images to be displayed simultaneously.

  Various methods can be adopted as a method for determining whether a frame is paired with any frame before or after the frame (whether it should be displayed simultaneously). For example, the image division module 4150f specifies, for example, an ODD level frame and an EVEN level frame as a pair when the field signal FIELD changes from an ODD level to an EVEN level for the first time from a state in which the field signal FIELD does not change. Thereafter, the pair may be repeated. In the example of FIG. 181, in the VDP output, the third image data DATA3 and the first half of the frame portion for outputting the fourth image data DATA4 are treated as one pair P1, and the latter half of the output of the fourth image data DATA4. And the first half of the frame portion for outputting the fifth image data DATA5 are treated as one pair P2, and the second half of the frame portion for outputting the fifth image data DATA5 and the sixth image data DATA6 are output. The first half frame portion is treated as one pair P3.

  Regarding the first panel LCD1, in the pair of frames in which the field signal FIELD is not changed and maintained at the ODD level, the image division module 4150f (output control unit 4150fd: FIG. 176) performs image data corresponding to the first frame. May be output continuously twice (for two frames) (for example, the fifth image data DATA5 may be output twice for the third pair P3). Instead, the image division module 4150f may switch the image data for each frame (for example, for the third pair P3, the fifth image data DATA5 is output, and the sixth image data DATA6 is output as the next frame). May be output).

  Regarding the second panel LCD2, the second panel LCD2 is maintained in a transparent state after the last frame FL4 of the fourth image data DATA4. As a method for maintaining the transparent state of the second panel LCD 2, any method can be adopted as in the embodiment of FIG. 180.

  Further, as the processing of the image division module 4150f, various other processing can be employed. For example, the image division module 4150f may determine that a display panel that has not been designated should be made transparent when the same field signal FIELD continues for two or more frames. For example, in the example of FIG. 181, the image division module 4150f sets the first panel LCD1 to the transparent state when outputting the fourth image data DATA4 (the EVEN level field signal FIELD continues for two frames). Good. Then, when outputting the subsequent image data (followed by the ODD level field signal FIELD), the second panel LCD2 may be set in a transparent state.

  As described above, in the embodiment of FIG. 181, the transition from the two-screen display to the single-screen display (first panel LCD 1) can proceed smoothly. The transition from the one-screen display (first panel LCD 1) to the two-screen display may be performed following the procedure reverse to the procedure of FIG. The schedule data may be configured in advance so that a desired image is displayed on a desired display panel in consideration of the operations of the VDP 4150c and the image dividing module 4150f.

[3-7D. Time-division (from 2 screen display to rear display)]
FIG. 182 is a timing chart showing an outline of switching processing from a state in which images are displayed on the two panels LCD1 and LCD2 to a state in which only the second panel LCD2 displays an image. In this process, the first panel LCD 1 is switched to the transparent state.

  FIG. 182 shows a timing chart similar to FIG. In the example of FIG. 182, the first panel LCD1 is associated only with the first image data DATA1 and the third image data DATA3, and the second panel LCD2 is associated with the other image data.

  In the VDP 4150c (FIG. 176), for the image data before the fourth image data DATA4, the image data for one screen is generated every time for one frame, and for the image data after the fifth image data DATA5, Image data for one screen is generated every two frames. For image data before the second image data DATA2, the output image data is switched every time for one frame, and for image data after the third image data DATA3, the output image data Switching is performed every two frames. When the same image data is output over two consecutive frames, the VDP 4150c (output processing unit 4150cc: FIG. 176) may output the same image data twice without changing the synchronization signal. Alternatively, the frequency of the synchronization signal may be reduced and the image data may be output only once using the time for two frames.

  As the schedule data and the processing of the image division module 4150f, various aspects similar to the example of FIG. 181 can be adopted.

  As described above, the transition from the two-screen display to the single-screen display (second panel LCD 2) can proceed smoothly. The transition from the one-screen display (second panel LCD 2) to the two-screen display may be performed following the procedure reverse to the procedure of FIG. The schedule data may be configured in advance so that a desired image is displayed on a desired display panel in consideration of the operations of the VDP 4150c and the image dividing module 4150f.

[3-7E. Spatial division]
FIG. 183 is a schematic diagram illustrating “space division” which is another mode of image (data) division. In this space division, the VDP 4150c (FIG. 176) generates data obtained by connecting frame data (image data) for the first panel LCD1 and frame data for the second panel LCD2 as frame data for one sheet. To do. That is, image data corresponding to one screen (hereinafter referred to as “original image data”) supplied from the VDP 4150c to the image division module 4150f is image data for the first panel LCD1 and image data for the second panel LCD2. Including. For example, the first original image data DATA1 shown in FIG. 183 is data obtained by connecting the image data DATA1B for the second panel LCD2 behind the image data DATA1A for the first panel LCD1. In the VDP 4150c, the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the original image data can be different from the number of pixels in the horizontal direction on the display panels LCD1 and LCD2. Similarly, the number of pixels in the vertical direction of the original image data may be different from the number of pixels in the vertical direction in the display panels LCD1 and LCD2.

  The image division module 4150f (image signal division logic 4150fb) divides the received data into data for the first panel LCD1 and data for the second panel LCD2, using the image size of each panel LCD1, LCD2. . As shown in FIG. 177, the image division module 4150f specifies the image sizes SZ1 and SZ2 using the parameters recorded in the register 4150fc. The image division module 4150f extracts the first image size SZ1 portion at the head of the received original image data as the image data for the first panel LCD1, and the remaining portion (second image size SZ2 portion) as the second panel. Extracted as image data for the LCD 2. Then, the image dividing module 4150f supplies the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the first synchronization signal SSO to the first panel LCD1 via the transmitter 4150h. The image division module 4150f supplies the image data for the second panel LCD2 and the second synchronization signal SSE to the second panel LCD2 via the transmitter 4150i. As a result, images are displayed on the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2. The displayed image can change with time.

  The original image data is transferred pixel by pixel from the VDP 4150c to the image division module 4150f in accordance with the synchronization signal (FIG. 176). The image division module 4150f (image signal division logic 4150fb) may specify the front part and the rear part of the original image data in accordance with the transfer order. The image signal division logic 4150fb uses either one or both of the first image size SZ1 and the second image size SZ2, thereby allowing the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 to be used. (If the total number of pixels represented by the received data is the same as the total value of the first image size SZ1 and the second image size SZ2, only one of the image sizes SZ1 and SZ2 is used. Good). The register 4150fc is not limited to information indicating the height and width, and may store other various information (for example, the total number of pixels) that can specify the image size (screen size). The image division module 4150f The image size may be specified using such information.

  FIG. 184 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of processing by space division. FIG. 184 shows a timing chart similar to FIG. In the embodiment of FIG. 184, as in the embodiment of FIG. 179, the two drawing means alternately perform drawing processing (first drawing D1 and second drawing D2). Original image data DATA1, DATA3, DATA4, DATA5,... Are generated in order by two drawing means. However, unlike the embodiment of FIG. 179, all the original image data includes the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2. The time secured for one drawing process by each drawing means is a time for two frames (first drawing D1 and second drawing D2). In the embodiment of FIG. 184, the data size of the original image data is the data size for two display panels (for two frames). The VDP 4150c (output processing unit 4150cc: FIG. 176) outputs original image data (corresponding to one frame in the VDP 4150c) by using the time for two consecutive frames (for example, the output processing unit 4150cc is a display panel). Data may be output at a frame rate half that of LCD1 and LCD2.) The field signal FIELD is not used (in the embodiment of FIG. 184, the field signal FIELD is maintained at a predetermined level (here, ODD level)).

  The schedule data (FIG. 183) is configured in advance so that original image data including image data for the first panel LCD1 and image data for the second panel LCD2 is generated by one drawing process. . For example, the schedule data may be configured so that image data representing an image obtained by connecting an image for the first panel LCD1 and an image for the second panel LCD2 is generated as the original image data. Here, the schedule data (screen data) is configured so that the original image data represents two images to be displayed in a superimposed manner.

  The image division module 4150f acquires original image data through a period of two frames. Then, the image division module 4150f supplies the image data for the first panel LCD 1 extracted from the original image data to the first panel LCD 1 over two frames, as in the embodiment of FIG. The image dividing module 4150f supplies the image data for the second panel LCD 2 extracted from the original image data to the second panel LCD 2 over two frames.

  By repeating the above processing, images are displayed on the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2. The displayed image can change with time.

  As will be described later, as the effect display by the liquid crystal display device 1400, an effect display in which an image is displayed only on the first panel LCD 1 and the entire surface of the second panel LCD 2 is kept white (transparent state) can be employed. is there. Conversely, it is also possible to employ an effect display that displays an image only on the second panel LCD 2 and maintains the entire surface of the first panel LCD 1 in white (transparent state). In the case of realizing such an effect display, schedule data is configured so that image data indicating that the entire surface is white (that is, transparent) is supplied to a display panel that is maintained in a transparent state. That's fine.

  Further, as will be described later, as the effect display by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the image displayed on the first panel LCD1 disposed in front and the image displayed on the second panel LCD2 disposed later are overlapped. An effect display full of a sense of depth can be realized. As described above, when realizing such an effect display, it is important to maintain synchronization between the image displayed on the first panel LCD 1 and the image displayed on the second panel LCD 2. .

  Therefore, in the embodiment of FIG. 184, as shown in FIG. 184, the image division module 4150f receives the original image data including the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2, and Image data for the first panel LCD1 and image data for the second panel LCD2 are extracted from the image data. Then, the image division module 4150f handles the two pieces of image data extracted from the common original image data as data representing two images to be displayed simultaneously (overlapping). For two images to be displayed at the same time, the image division module 4150f (output control unit 4150fd) supplies image data for the first panel LCD1 to the first panel LCD1 at approximately the same timing, and for the second panel LCD2. Are supplied to the second panel LCD 2.

  As described above, the image division module 4150f receives the original image data, and extracts the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 from the original image data. Then, the image dividing module 4150f supplies a drive signal to each of the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2. As a result, even if a problem (for example, processing delay) occurs in the processing in the image division module 4150f, an image displayed on one display panel is an image displayed on the other display panel. Compared to, it is possible to reduce the possibility of moving forward or behind.

  The image division module 4150f receives the original image data (that is, the image data of the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2) and then supplies the image data to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 all at once. As described above, the image division module 4150f does not output the image data in a state where reception of only one of the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 to be displayed at the same time is completed. In addition, image data is supplied to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 only after both receptions are completed. As a result, two images that should be displayed in an overlapping manner can be appropriately overlapped and displayed.

  In the embodiment of FIG. 184, the VDP 4150c (drawing engine 4150ca) generates (outputs) original image data including image data for the first panel LCD1 and image data for the second panel LCD2. The possibility that image data for the display panel is continuously output can be greatly reduced. Further, since the VDP 4150c may handle such original image data as image data representing one screen, the configuration of the VDP 4150c can be simplified. As described above, according to the embodiment of FIG. 184, it is possible to display images on a plurality of display panels with only one general-purpose VDP.

  Note that various modes can be adopted as a mode for connecting image data. For example, the frame data for the first panel LCD 1 may be connected after the frame data for the second panel LCD 2.

[Modified example of control of multiple display panels]
Modification 1:
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 179, the image division module 4150f treats the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the subsequent image data for the second panel LCD2 as a pair to be displayed simultaneously (overlapping). However, the image data for the second panel LCD 2 and the subsequent image data for the first panel LCD 1 may be handled as a pair to be displayed simultaneously. In any case, the VDP 4150c outputs the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 to be displayed simultaneously in a predetermined order (for example, the first panel LCD1, the second panel The order may be in the order of the panel LCD 2 or vice versa, or may be output continuously (here, “continuous” means that no other image is inserted between the two images) . Then, the image division module 4150f may treat the two pieces of image data received in that order as a pair to be displayed simultaneously. Note that the VDP 4150c preferably generates image data in the same order as the output order. In this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that generation of image data will not be in time for output.

  Further, as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 178 and 183, when the VDP 4150c alternately outputs the image for the first panel LCD1 and the image for the second panel LCD2, the image dividing module 4150f (output control unit) 4150 fd) may switch the display image of the first panel LCD 1 and the display image of the second panel LCD 2 alternately instead of simultaneously. For example, in response to receiving an image for the first panel LCD1, the image division module 4150f displays (updates) the image on the first panel LCD1 before receiving the subsequent image for the second panel LCD2. In response to receiving an image for the second panel LCD 2 later, before the subsequent image for the first panel LCD 1 is received, the process of displaying (updating) the image on the second panel LCD 2 is repeated. Also good.

  For example, the case where it applies to the example of FIG. 179 is demonstrated. When receiving the first image data DATA1, the image division module 4150f supplies the first image data DATA1 to the first panel LCD1 over two frames without waiting for the reception of the second image data DATA2. Next, when receiving the second image data DATA2, the image division module 4150f supplies the second image data DATA2 to the second panel LCD 2 over two frames without waiting for the reception of the third image data DATA3. One frame in the second half of the first image data DATA1 overlaps with one frame in the first half of the second image data DATA2. Thereafter, the image division module 4150f repeats the same processing. As a result, one frame in the second half of the second image data DATA2 overlaps with one frame in the first half of the third image data DATA3.

  According to the above processing, the image division module 4150f alternately switches the images displayed on the two panels LCD1 and LCD2, thereby displaying the image display time on the first panel LCD1 and the image display on the second panel LCD2. Time can be superimposed alternately. The front part of the display time of a certain image overlaps with the rear part of the display time of the image supplied immediately before from the VDP 4150c. The rear part of the display time of a certain image overlaps with the front part of the display time of the image supplied one after the VDP 4150c. Thus, a part of the display time of the image displayed on the first panel LCD 1 overlaps with a part of the display time of the image displayed on the second panel LCD 2. When configuring the schedule data, it is preferable to configure the schedule data so that appropriate presentation display is realized in consideration of the overlap of the display times of the images.

  The VDP 4150c alternately supplies the image on the first panel LCD1 and the image on the second panel LCD2 to the image dividing module 4150f, and the image dividing module 4150f responds to the alternate supply of the images. Since the display image and the display image on the second panel LCD 2 are alternately updated, even if a processing failure occurs in the VDP 4150c or the image dividing module 4150f, the image between the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2 is displayed. Misalignment can be prevented.

  In general, the VDP 4150c is data (referred to as “first type image data”) representing an image (referred to as “first type image”) displayed on the first panel LCD1, and an image displayed on the second panel LCD2. Data (referred to as "second type image data") representing (referred to as "second type image") may be output alternately. Further, the VDP 4150c continuously outputs the first-type image and the second-type image data (first-type image data and second-type image data) to be displayed with a part or all of the display time superimposed. (Here, “continuous” means that no other image data is output during the output of the image data for two sheets). Here, the VDP 4150c may output the first type image data and the second type image data as different images as in the embodiments of FIGS. 178 and 179, and the embodiments of FIGS. As described above, data obtained by connecting the first type image data and the second type image data may be output as one image. The image division module 4150f may acquire (separate) the first type image data and the second type image data using the data received from the VDP 4150c. Then, the image division module 4150f sends a signal representing the first type image data to the first panel so that at least a part of the display time overlaps with the first type image data and the second type image data acquired successively. What is necessary is just to output toward the LCD1, and output the signal showing 2nd type image data toward the 2nd panel LCD2. In any case, the overlapping mode of the display time of the first type image and the display time of the second type image may be determined in advance. For example, as in the embodiment of FIGS. 179 and 184, the entire display time of the first type image may overlap with the entire display time of the second type image. Instead, a predetermined part (for example, the front part or the rear part) of the display time of the first type image overlaps a predetermined part (for example, the rear part or the front part) of the display time of the second type image. It may be. Further, a pair of images to be displayed with at least a part of the display time superimposed may be designated each time by the VDP 4150c. In addition, the image to be displayed with at least a part of the display time overlapped may be determined in advance in the schedule data.

Modification 2:
In the embodiments of FIGS. 189 to 184 described above, the procedure for shifting from the two-screen display to the single-screen display (one screen is maintained in a transparent state) is not limited to the procedure shown in FIGS. Various procedures can be employed. For example, at the timing when the VDP 4150c instructs the image division module 4150f to display a single screen, the image division module 4150f may start the single screen display.

Modification 3:
In each of the embodiments in FIGS. 189 to 184 described above, the first image size SZ1 of the first panel LCD1 may be different from the second image size SZ2 of the second panel LCD2. FIG. 185 is an explanatory diagram of the first synchronization signal SSO and the second synchronization signal SSE when the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 having different image sizes (screen sizes) are used. As in FIG. 177, some of the parameters recorded in the register 4150fc and the image sizes (screen sizes) of the panels LCD1 and LCD2 are shown in the figure. In the example of FIG. 185, the first panel LCD 1 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA size) in the vertical direction. Correspondingly, the first effective horizontal width HAW1 is set to “800”, and the first effective vertical width VAW1 is set to “600”. On the other hand, the second panel LCD 2 has 536 pixels in the horizontal direction and 328 pixels in the vertical direction. Correspondingly, the second effective horizontal width HAW2 is set to “536”, and the second effective vertical width VAW2 is set to “328”. Other types of parameters (for example, horizontal synchronization cycles HC1, HC2, vertical synchronization cycles VC1, VC2, etc.) are also set to values suitable for each display panel.

  The output control unit 4150fd (FIG. 176) can output appropriate synchronization signals SSO and SSE to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 based on the parameters stored in the register 4150fc. Here, the parameter value of the synchronization signal (for example, the frequency of the clock signal, the width of the data enable signal, etc.) may be different between the first synchronization signal SSO and the second synchronization signal SSE. The clock generation unit 4150fg (FIG. 176) may have two clock generation units for the synchronization signals SSO and SSE. Instead of this, two types of clock signals may be generated from one clock generation unit by multiplication or frequency division. In addition, when the frequency of the clock signal is the same between the first synchronization signal SSO and the second synchronization signal SSE, the clock generation unit 4150fg branches the clock signal generated by one clock generation unit. The basic clock signals iCLKO and iCLKE may be output. The output control unit 4150fd may branch one clock signal and output it as clock signals CLKO and CLKE. In any case, the output control unit 4150fd preferably outputs the synchronization signals SSO and SSE independently of the input synchronization signal SSI.

  As described above, even when the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 having different image sizes are used, a synchronization signal suitable for the image size is output to each of the display panels LCD1 and LCD2. As a result, an image can be appropriately displayed on each of the display panels LCD1 and LCD2. As a result, various presentation displays using the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 having different image sizes are possible.

  Note that this modification may be applied to the time division shown in FIGS. 178 and 179. In this case, it is preferable that the total number of pixels of one image data output from the VDP 4150c is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the total number of pixels of each display panel. In this way, an image (an image for one sheet) of an arbitrary display panel among the plurality of display panels can be represented by the image data for one sheet from the VDP 4150c.

  Note that the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the image data from the VDP 4150c is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of each display panel, and the number of pixels in the vertical direction of the image data from the VDP 4150c is It is preferable that the number of pixels is not less than the maximum value in the vertical direction. The image for each display panel is preferably represented by a rectangular area in one image represented by the image data output from the VDP 4150c. In this way, the VDP 4150c can easily execute sprite drawing and image processing when generating image data for each display panel. If the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of a certain display panel is larger than the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the image data output from the VDP 4150c, a plurality of pixel lines in the display panel are included in the VDP 4150c. Represented by the pixel line. In this case, since the VDP 4150c performs image processing (drawing processing) in consideration of the fact that a plurality of pixel lines represent one pixel line, the processing may be complicated. is there. However, the VDP 4150c may execute processing in consideration of such pixel line folding.

  Further, this modification may be applied to the space division shown in FIGS. 183 and 184. In this case, it is preferable that the total number of pixels of one image data output from the VDP 4150c is equal to or greater than the total value of the total number of pixels of each display panel. In this way, each image of the plurality of display panels can be represented at a time by one image data from the VDP 4150c. When the number of pixels in the horizontal direction is the same between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, it is preferable to set the number of pixels in the horizontal direction in the image data drawn by the VDP 4150c to the same value. . In other words, it is preferable that the VDP 4150c generates original image data representing an image obtained by arranging the image for the second panel LCD2 below (or above) the image for the first panel LCD1. In this way, in the original image data, it is possible to prevent horizontal displacement of another pixel line with respect to a certain pixel line (horizontal line) (for example, one horizontal line of an image on the second panel LCD 2 is The original image data can be prevented from being arranged across two adjacent lines). As a result, the VDP 4150c appropriately executes sprite rendering as in the case where the original image data represents an image for one screen even though the original image data represents an image for two screens. be able to. However, the VDP 4150c may be configured so as to execute the drawing process in consideration of such a horizontal position shift.

Modification 4:
In the embodiments of FIGS. 179 to 185 described above, the synchronization signals SSO and SSE actually supplied from the image division module 4150f to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 are derived from the input synchronization signal SSI output from the VDP 4150c for drawing an image. It is independent (separated). Therefore, various cycles (for example, vertical synchronization frequency) in the input synchronization signal SSI may be different from the cycles in the synchronization signals SSO and SSE. Further, the various cycles in the first synchronization signal SSO may be different from the cycle in the second synchronization signal SSE. As described above, the selection of the VDP 4150c, the selection of the first panel LCD1, and the selection of the second panel LCD2 can be performed without being restricted by each other. In particular, even when a special configuration in which two display panels are used in an overlapping manner is used, a VDP or display panel manufactured without assuming such a special configuration can be used. As a result, a high-performance VDP capable of realizing the above-described effect display can be selected from a wide range of candidates. In addition, a display panel that can express such an effect display can be selected from a wide range of candidates. As a result, it is possible to easily realize high-level effect display using two display panels.

Modification 5:
The synchronization signal output by the output control unit 4150fd (FIG. 176) of the image division module 4150f is not limited to the combination of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, the data enable, and the clock signal, and data and display representing the pixel color. Any signal that can be appropriately associated with a pixel in the panel can be employed. For example, the data enable signal may be omitted, and the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal may be used as the synchronization signal. Alternatively, the horizontal synchronization signal may be omitted, and the vertical synchronization signal, the data enable signal, and the clock signal may be used as the synchronization signal. Furthermore, both the horizontal synchronization signal and the vertical synchronization signal may be omitted, and the data enable signal and the clock signal may be used as the synchronization signal. Generally, the synchronization signal required for driving the display panel is determined in advance based on the specifications of the display panel. Therefore, the output control unit 4150fd may be configured to output a synchronization signal suitable for the display panel to be used. When the specifications differ between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, the first synchronization signal SSO may be different from the second synchronization signal SSE. In any case, when a digital signal is used, it is preferable to use a synchronization signal including at least a clock signal.

  Similarly, various signals can be adopted as the synchronization signal output by the VDP 4150c (output processing unit 4150cc). When the synchronization signal from the VDP 4150c is not supplied to the display panels LCD1 and LCD2 as in the above-described embodiments of FIGS. 189 to 185, the VDP 4150c is not limited to the synchronization signal that can be accepted by the display panel. (For example, even when the high-performance VDP synchronization signal is not compatible with the display panel, the VDP can be adopted). In any case, the image division module 4150f (input control unit 4150fa) may be configured so that image data can be acquired in accordance with the synchronization signal from the VDP 4150c.

Modification 6:
The liquid crystal control board 4150 may have only one function of “time division” and “space division”. Instead, it has both functions of “time division” and “space division”. It may be. When the liquid crystal control board 4150 has both functions, it is only necessary to determine which function is to be realized by a program stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b (FIG. 176). For example, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a that operates according to a program may instruct the VDP 4150c and the image division module 4150f to operate in “time division”. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a may switch the image (data) division mode during the operation.

Modification 7:
As the first panel LCD1, a display panel that can be driven by the same synchronization signal as that of the second panel LCD2 may be employed (for example, two identical display panels may be used as the display panels LCD1 and LCD2). In this case, the image division module 4150f (output control unit 4150fd) may branch the same synchronization signal and output substantially the same synchronization signal toward the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2. . Further, the synchronization signal output from the image division module 4150f (output control unit 4150fd) may be branched and supplied to the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2. Also in this case, the pre-branch synchronization signal output from the output control unit 4150fd functions as a first type synchronization signal for the first panel LCD1 and a second type synchronization signal for the second panel LCD2, respectively. It can be said that.

Modification 8:
As viewed from the player, a part or all of the first panel LCD 1 may be arranged so as not to overlap the second panel LCD 2. Also in this case, if the liquid crystal control board 4150 as in each of the embodiments of FIGS. 179 to 185 described above is used, the possibility that the image synchronization between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 is shifted can be reduced. . As a result, it is possible to appropriately realize the effect display using the two display panels LCD1 and LCD2. Further, the display panel (for example, the first panel LCD1 or the second panel LCD2) is not limited to the normally white liquid crystal panel, and may be a normally black liquid crystal panel.

Modification 9:
The internal configuration of the VDP 4150c is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 176, and various configurations can be employed. For example, all elements of the VDP 4150c may be connected to a common bus. Similarly, the internal configuration of the image division module 4150f is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 176, and various configurations can be employed. For example, the clock generation unit 4150fg may be provided in the image division module 4150f. The LVDS transmitters 4150h and 50i may be provided in the image division module 4150f. Further, the LVDS transmitters 4150h and 4150i may be omitted depending on the specifications of the display panel.

Modification 10:
The total number of display panels may be 3 or more. In general, N display panels (N is an integer of 2 or more) can be used. In this case, the VDP 4150c may repeatedly execute the process of outputting N images (image data) that should overlap at least part of the display time. Here, as in the embodiment of FIGS. 178 and 179, the VDP 4150 c may output the image data for N sheets as representing different images. Here, as the output order of the N images, a predetermined order may be adopted, or instead, the order may be determined each time by the VDP 4150c (for example, the order of the VDP 4150c is in accordance with the instruction of the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a). May be determined). In any case, the VDP 4150c (output processing unit 4150cc) outputs information (referred to as “display panel specifying information”) specifying a display panel associated with the image data together with one image (image data). It is preferable (for example, an N-bit signal for specifying one of the N display panels may be output). Then, the image division module 4150f (image signal division logic 4150fb) may specify the display panel associated with the received image data using the received display panel specifying information. Further, as in the embodiment of FIGS. 183 and 184, the VDP 4150c may output data obtained by concatenating N pieces of image data as one image.

  The VDP 4150c may divide the N images into M groups (M is an integer of 2 or more and less than N), and connect the image data for each group. In this case, the VDP 4150c may output the M pieces of image data as representing different images. For example, when six display panels are used, the VDP 4150c uses first data obtained by concatenating three pieces of image data and second data obtained by concatenating the remaining three pieces of image data. Each of these may be generated and output as representing one image. In any case, the image division module 4150f may acquire the image data of each display panel from the received data based on a predetermined method (for example, each display panel according to the order in which the image data is received). The image data of each display panel may be specified using the image size of each display panel). Further, the image division module 4150f may specify the image data of each display panel in accordance with an instruction from the VDP 4150c. The VDP 4150c may output the image data toward each of the N display panels so that at least a part of the display time overlaps.

  In any case, register 4150fc (FIGS. 176 and 184) preferably stores N sets of parameters that define synchronization signals suitable for each of the N display panels. Then, the output control unit 4150fd may output an appropriate synchronization signal to each of the N display panels based on the N sets of parameters. Here, it is preferable that the output control unit 4150fd outputs a synchronization signal for each of the N display panels independently of the input synchronization signal SSI. By doing this, the synchronization signal that can be output from the VDP does not have to be the same as the synchronization signal that can be displayed on the display panel. Therefore, each of the VDP and the display panel can be independently selected from a wide range of candidates. Can do. Further, the N display panels may include a plurality of display panels having different image sizes (screen sizes).

[3-8. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 187 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. FIG. 188 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 189 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating the change start process. FIG. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 195 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 196 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  As shown in FIG. 186, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is used. Executes processing to return to the power outage (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clears RAM 4100e and performs CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.) Do.

  When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. If the RAM clear switch 4100c that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e during the power-on process is on, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 during the power-on process, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Note that backup data is also stored in the RAM 4100e even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 851. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from an external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board 851, Supply to each device. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 851 is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, the power failure notice indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 851 to the main control board 4100 is stopped. A signal is transmitted. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  The process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 851 after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In order to start from the state, the state when the power failure occurs is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 4100e is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM 4100e before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM 4100e (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the blade 2125 that opens and closes the second start port 2102 by the solenoid 2128) is controlled. A process of changing the open / closed state of the two start ports 2102 is executed. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, or the special electric accessory (ie, the solenoid 2156 is used for the big prize opening). The winning door 2154) that opens and closes 2153 is controlled, and a process of changing the open / closed state of the special winning opening 2153 is executed.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (including “small hit” described later) (big hit determination), the big hit determination A random number for the big hit symbol used to determine whether or not to make a promiscuous big hit when it is determined that a big hit gaming state will be generated (probability change determination), a special symbol of A jackpot symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol, a reach determination used to determine whether or not to lose with a reach mode when it is determined that a big hit gaming state does not occur in the jackpot determination (reach determination) Random number, used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 Variable display pattern random (random number change time), there is usually per determining random number or the like used for whether or not to control the blade 2125 for opening and closing the second start hole 2102 in an open state determination (normally lottery per determination).

  In this example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state using a big hit determination random number. It is also determined whether or not to make a probability variation jackpot (the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than normal) using a jackpot symbol random number. Note that the variation display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol per set random number related to whether or not the blade 2125 is controlled to be opened. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the blade 2125 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the blade 2125 is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, and the player Can be prevented from being disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

  Next, in the special control process, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S20 to step S90 as shown in FIG. In the start opening winning process of step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102, and a process of updating the lottery hold state is executed when winning. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of stored (holding number) in each big hit lottery is confirmed. Set up. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state (profit granting state) is to be generated (winning determination means), and if a big hit gaming state is to be generated, whether or not to be a promising big hit is determined. . In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. Specifically, the variation display pattern of each special symbol is determined, and the variation time set corresponding to the variation display pattern (after the variation display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186) Set the timer to the time until stop.

  In the changing process of step S50, the timer set with the changing time is monitored in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40), and the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display is displayed based on the time-out of the timer. The special symbol display on the display 1186 (corresponding to the special symbol display 1185, 1186) is stopped. At this time, if it is determined in any one of the big win lotteries in the variation start process (step S30), the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and the small win game state is set in the same lottery. If the determination is made, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined to be the big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit game start process (profit granting state control means) in step S60, settings for starting the big hit game state are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, the number of times the winning door 2154 is opened and the opening time are set according to the type of jackpot. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 is opened and the opening time are set. In the big hit game process of step S80, the winning prize opening 2153 is opened and the winning door 2154 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the winning prize opening 2153 or when a predetermined period has passed. Process. Further, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, the process for making the winning door 2154 open again is performed. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, the processing selection flag Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, processing for generating a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state is executed (special gaming state control means).

  In the small hit game process of step S90, the bevel-shaped intrusion piece 2142 in the open / close drive mechanism 2136 of the first open / close winning device 2103 is projected into the game area 1100, and a game ball can be received. When the first open / close winning device 2103 is won or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a process for retracting the tongue-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 to make the game ball unacceptable is performed. Although the details will be described later, the opening of the tongue-shaped protrusion / disconnection piece 2142 in the small hit game process is set so that the profit to the player is extremely low compared to the big hit game process (step S80). Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

  Next, in the start opening winning process, as shown in FIG. 190, first, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2166, and the detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2166. In this case, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2166 is not output, the game ball is input to the second start port 2102. Is determined not to win (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won at the second starting port 2102, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 4100e. It is determined whether or not the value of the second pending number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S202). If the second hold number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are executed. These processes will be described later. If the value of the second hold number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 2166 at step S201 (NO at step S201), or when the value of the second reserved number counter is 4 (NO at step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 2101 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from first start port sensor 3524. When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the first start port 2101 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM 4100e is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4 (step S206). If the first hold number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first hold number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  Subsequently, in the variation start process, as shown in FIG. 191, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”. If it is “0” (YES in step S301), the process after step S302 is performed. If the process is executed and is not “0” (NO in step S301), the change start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are “0”. Since the sum of the values in the two pending number counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the start memory storage area (special symbol random number storage means 4515, 2940 (see FIG. 198)), in step S302 If the value of any of the holding number counters is both “0” (YES), it is determined that the start condition regarding the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S317.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the number-of-holds counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO), the start memory transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 198 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). Each is associated with the value of the stored number (“1” to “4”). As shown in FIG. 198 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). The two start memory numbers (“1” to “4”) are associated with each value. Each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d includes a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which a big hit symbol random number is stored. .

  In the start memory transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number memory. It is determined whether or not random numbers are stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the means 4532 (step S303). If random numbers are stored (NO), each of the nth storage areas (n is a natural number of 2 or more) Processing for shifting various random numbers stored in (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively. (Step S304) and processing for obtaining a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a (Step S305) are executed. In addition, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S306), and a process of subtracting “1” from the holding number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S307).

  On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0”. (YES in step S303), stored in each of the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 (n is a natural number of 2 or more). Stored in the storage area [1] 4515a and the process of shifting the various random numbers to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively. A process of acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol (step S309) is executed. Further, a process of subtracting “1” from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S311) is executed.

  That is, regarding the first special symbol, when holding, as in the case of the second special symbol, the value of the holding number counter (first start memory number) is increased by “1”, and the extracted random number is It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start memory number, but when the first special symbol starts to change, only when the second start memory number is “0”, that is, the first special symbol Each random number is read from the first storage area “1” 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 only when one process is waiting and the second processing by the second special symbol is not waiting. ing. This control enables the second process to be performed with priority over the first process.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot Select a highly set table. In this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 6/499 when the probability variation is not activated (ie, normal), and the probability of being a big hit is 60 when the probability variation is activated (ie, when the probability is high). / 499.

  After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, based on that table, the random number related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 is a random number corresponding to the big hit (big hit value) ) Is determined (step S315). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, if the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. If it is not the small hit value (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. Note that the ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the RAM 4100e. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  Next, in the variation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 192, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “1”. If the process flag is “1” in step S317 (YES in step S401), If the process after step S402 is not “1” (NO in step S401), the variation pattern setting process is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is “ON”. If the flag is “ON” in step S316 (YES in step S402), the probability variation jackpot or It is determined which of the big hits is a normal big hit (step S403). If it is a big hit with probability fluctuation (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit (step S404). As will be described in detail later, any of the probability variation jackpots is “a probability variation state in which the probability that a specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than usual, and any special symbol display 1185. When the special symbol changing time in 1186 is shortened (relatively shorter than normal time), and the ease of winning in the second starting port 2102 is increased more than usual, “Generating” is common, but it is set so that the degree of profit given to the player is greatly different between the probability fluctuation big hit that is a special hit and the general probability fluctuation big hit that is not a special hit.

  In other words, in the general probability fluctuation big hit, the opening time per winning door 2154 that opens and closes the big winning opening 2153 is set to a time that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win with a lot of time. In addition, the opening / closing operation of the winning door 2154 is controlled to be performed a number of times (for example, 7 times) for giving many profits. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit which is a special hit, the opening time of the winning door 2154 per time is set to such a time that several (for example, one or two) game balls can barely win. The winning door 2154 is controlled to open and close twice, for example.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO), a probability variation big hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while a special hit is determined. If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation is not big hit, that is, if it is decided that the normal big hit is made (YES), the normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S408), and “ON” is determined in step S319. If YES (YES in step S408), the small hit change display pattern table is selected (step S409). When the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). ) If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), a change display pattern table for loss reach is selected (step 411). If it is not a reach value (NO in step S410), a change display for loss is displayed. A pattern table is selected (step S412).

  In this way, when a variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is selected based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Is determined (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variable display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a timer (this implementation) provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 has a variable time corresponding to the variable display pattern. In this form, it is set to an effective period timer (step S415). In step S415, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the effective period timer.

  Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in command transmission output processing. When a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, and the special symbol variable display is started. Let Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S416), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the changing process, as shown in FIG. 193, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501), and when it is “2” in step S416 (step S501). If YES in step S502, the process after step S502 is executed. If it is not “2” (NO in step S501), the process under change is terminated. In step S502, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). When the variation time is up, that is, when the variation time is over (YES in step S503), the variation is stopped (step S504).

  If none of the special symbols has changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without being stopped. The process ends.

  After stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON” (step S505). If the big hit flag is “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “3”. (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S507). If it is “ON”, the processing flag is set to “4”. Is updated to “0” (step S508). If it is not “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S509). As described above, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the changing process is ended.

  Next, in the big hit game start processing, as shown in FIG. 194, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “3”. If it is “3” in step S506 (YES in step S601). ), The process after step S602 is executed, and if it is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. If the probability variation state is present (YES), the operation of the probability variation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. To do. If the state is not the probability variation state, that is, if it is the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state is set. If the time saving gaming state is set (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S605). The process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is not the short-time gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process in step S605.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a general jackpot or a special jackpot. If the jackpot is a general jackpot (NO in step S606), the winning door 2153 is opened by the winning door 2154. The conditions, that is, the number of big hits to be released, the opening time per time, and the winning limit 2153 to the big winning opening 2153 are set (step S607). On the other hand, if the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the number of special hits to be released at the big winning opening 2153, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time per time are set (step S608). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game start processing, as shown in FIG. 195, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “4”. If it is “4” in step S508 (YES in step S701). ), The processing of step S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is terminated without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. To do. In step S702, the opening condition of the first open / close winning device 2103 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of small hits released by the protrusion of the bell-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142, and the opening time per one are set. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S703), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

  Next, in the big hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 196, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”. If it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801). If the process after step S802 is not “5” (NO in step S801), the big hit game process is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 2153 is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2153 is a predetermined time set in advance. Is reached (step S803), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the winning door 2154 is operated to close the special winning opening 2153 (step S805).

  Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 2153 after the big prize opening 2153 is opened is set in step S607. If the limit number (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805 to close the special prize opening 2153. If the opening time of the big winning opening 2153 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit number (NO in step S804), The jackpot game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big prize opening 2153 is not being opened in step S802 (NO), the number of times the big prize opening 2153 is opened by the prize winning door 2154 is set in the number of big hits opened in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the specified number of special hits has been reached (step S806). If it has not reached (NO in step S806), the winning door 2154 is controlled to open the big winning opening 2153 (step S807), and the big hit game processing is ended. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be awarded to the big prize opening 2153.

  In step S806, when the number of times of opening the grand prize opening 2153 reaches the set number (YES), that is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the processing of step S808 to step S813 is executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set the game state for. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a win that activates the probability variation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit including the special hit or the normal big hit. Here, the probability that the probability variation is a big hit is 95%, and the probability that the normal big hit is 5%. If the winning is a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started and a probability variation state with a high probability is set (step S810). In other words, in the subsequent lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than usual, and the time shortening function is activated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches, for example, 96 times (specified number). Let

  If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function or the short time function is in operation (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or if a special hit is won when the probability fluctuation function or the time reduction function is already activated, The operation of the time reduction function is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). That is, the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 changes the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the opening operation of the blade 2125 opens the second special opening indicator 2102. Increase the ease of winning a prize. On the other hand, if the probability variation function and the time-shortening function are not in operation, that is, if the probability variation state and the time-saving gaming state have not occurred and the special win is won (NO in step S814), the time-shortening function The process proceeds to step S813 without operating.

  On the other hand, if it is not a win that activates the probability variation function in step S809, that is, if it is a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time reduction function is started and the specified number of operations in the time reduction function is set (step S815). Then, the process proceeds to step S813. That is, the time-shortening function is operated until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches, for example, 96 times (specified number).

  Next, in the small hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 197, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If it is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901). ), The process after step S902 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S901), the small hit game process is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won for the first open / close winning device 2103 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902), and if it has not yet reached the maximum number of winnings. (NO), it is determined whether or not the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is in the protruding position (that is, the game ball can be received) (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the tongue-shaped protrusion / depression piece 2142 is in the protruding position (YES), the protrusion time (elapsed time after the protrusion) of the tongue-shaped protrusion / depression piece 2142 is a predetermined time set in advance. Is reached (step S904), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the bevel-shaped in / out piece 2142 is retracted to make it impossible to win the first open / close winning device 2103. (Step S905). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of protrusions of the tongue-shaped protrusion / depression piece 2142 has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906). If the number has reached that number (YES), the processing flag is set. It is updated to “0” (step S907), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S904, if the protruding time of the tongue-shaped protrusion 2142 has not reached the predetermined time (NO), or if the number of protrusions has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is performed. The small hit game process is terminated without executing. In step S903, if the bello-shaped intrusion piece 2142 is not in the protruding position (NO), the bello-shaped indentation piece 2142 is protruded to allow a game ball to be won (step S908). In step S902, if the number of winning game balls for the first open / close winning device 2103 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (YES), it is determined whether or not the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2142 is in the protruding position. If it is the protruding position (YES), the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is retracted (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, if bellows-shaped protrusion / contraction piece 2142 is not in the protruding position (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process in step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

[3-9. Drive control by scheduler on peripheral control board]
The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls a control program, and the control program includes a CA unit 4141 (hereinafter referred to as “command analysis unit”) and an SC unit 4142 (hereinafter referred to as “scheduler control unit”) as shown in FIG. ing. The command analysis unit 4141 analyzes the command received from the main control board 4100 and writes the command information for each identifier included in the command to the work 4144.

  On the other hand, based on the command information for each identifier written in the WK (hereinafter referred to as “work”) 4144, the scheduler control unit 4142, the first output device 4145a, the second output device 4145b, the first output device corresponding to the identifier. It is possible to acquire drive control information related to any one of the third output device 4145c and the fourth output device 4145d, and to control each drive target based on this drive control information.

  Here, the first output device 4145a corresponds to, for example, the above-described speaker 821 and the like, and the second output device 4145b corresponds to, for example, a lamp. The third output device 4145c corresponds to, for example, a motor, and the fourth output device 4145d corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The scheduler control unit 4142 selects command information written for each identifier in the work 4144 and schedule data 4143 corresponding to the identifier. The schedule data 4143 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b.

  Here, the schedule data 4143 includes first schedule data related to sound output control (hereinafter referred to as “sound schedule data”) 4143a (corresponding to “first SD” shown in the figure), and second schedule data related to lamp output. Schedule data (hereinafter referred to as “lamp schedule data”) 4143b (corresponding to “second SD” in the figure), third schedule data relating to motor driving (hereinafter referred to as “motor schedule data”) 4143c (in the figure “ 3rd SD ”and 4th schedule data (hereinafter referred to as“ display schedule data ”) 4143d (corresponding to“ fourth SD ”in the figure) related to the display operation by the liquid crystal display device 1900. Yes. In this embodiment, as an example, the scheduler control unit 4142 uses the motor schedule data 4143c. The scheduler control unit 4142 controls the motor drive board 3015 based on the schedule data 4143.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described identifier is given to distinguish the above-described motors from each other. Based on the schedule data 4143a, 4143b, 4143c, and 4143d, the scheduler control unit 4142 controls a plurality of motors controlled by the schedule data 4143a, 4143b, and 4143c, speakers, lamps, or motors and lamps. Control is performed so that the display operation of the liquid crystal display device 1900 controlled by the display schedule data 4143d is synchronized with each other.

  When a plurality of command information is written in the work 4144, the scheduler control unit 4142 obtains a plurality of corresponding drive control information based on the plurality of command information, and the plurality of driving information along the schedule data 4143c. A plurality of driving objects are synchronized and controlled in a driving mode based on the control information. The scheduler control unit 4142 controls the relay board based on the motor schedule data 4143c, and causes the relay board to output, for example, a pulsed excitation signal in which excitation is updated every interrupt for every 16 ms to each motor.

  Here, the scheduler control unit 4142 performs control for outputting an excitation signal when attempting to drive the motor. The scheduler control unit 4142 performs control to synchronize the movable bodies with respect to the effect rendering executed during the variable display as follows. According to the configuration as described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by adopting a natural movable mode in which these movable objects are synchronized with each other and a rendering mode that does not give a sense of incongruity to the player's eyes. It becomes.

[3-10. Control processing at peripheral control unit]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 202 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 203 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210).

  In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 200, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, an initial setting process is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, At the same time as T is set, the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 provided in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 based on the effect command received from the main control board 4100. , 430, 432, etc., and processing for controlling the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc. of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above-described steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  Next, in the 16 ms steady process, the sub-peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes in steps S1100 to S1600 as shown in FIG. In the command analysis process in step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1200, a control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, setting of a notice effect, determination of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol, and the like are performed.

  In the sound control process in step S1300, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, and 821 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect is executed. In the light emission decoration control process of step S1400, the control process regarding the light emission decoration by each decoration board | substrate 214,216,254,256,286,320,322,430,432 provided in the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is performed. . In the information output process in step S1500, an effect command is transmitted to each relay board 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S1100 to step S1600 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (in step S1100 described later). Do not execute (from command parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. Start.

  In this example, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  Next, in the command analysis processing, as shown in FIG. 202, first, it is determined whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 4100, other processing such as 16 ms steady processing is interrupted to generate command reception interrupt processing, and the received command is transmitted to the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 4140. The received command storage area in the RAM 4140e is saved. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the effect commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the areas corresponding to the reception order of the effect commands. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command in the reception order of the reception command storage area is read (step S1102).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), the variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1104).

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S1105), and if the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). Further, if the read effect command is not a probability change big hit command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 203, the effect control process performs any one of steps S1210 to S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting is made to start the decorative symbol variation display if a variable display pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, and the setting of the notice effect is performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the processing selection flag is “1”, when the variation stop command is received, a control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 to stop the decorative symbol variation display. Do.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a display or jackpot indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is given to the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to display the game state (for example, round display).

  Next, in the decorative symbol variation start process, as shown in FIG. 204, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above and indicates that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221, (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

  If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol for the lost symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variation display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1223b). If the probability variation big hit flag is set (YES), the probability variation big hit symbol is determined. Is determined (step S1225). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probable big hit symbol is determined (step S1226). In addition, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot gaming state is started in the jackpot display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), specifically, when the variation stop command is received, the reset is performed. Alternatively, it may be reset when the big hit gaming state is ended in the big hit display process (step S1230).

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol. A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as “common decorative symbol sequence”) corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of a combination of figures such as circles, crosses, sankaku, and the like. , And combinations that are lost are set in advance. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, stop any combination symbol from the multiple combinations set as the probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or the multiple combinations set as the non-probable big hit symbol Determine as a symbol.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a notice selection process for determining whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1227), and is then stored in the variable display pattern and the notice type storage area. A display command is set according to the notice pattern and the stop symbol of the common decorative symbol sequence determined in steps S1225, S1226, and S1227 (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process ends (step S1229). The display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S1500), and the liquid crystal display is based on the reception of the display command by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The apparatus 1900 starts executing the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after the notice pattern is read. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the change display of the previous decoration symbol is erroneously started in the next decoration pattern change display from being executed.

[4-1. Functional configuration for games on the main control board]
Next, a functional configuration related to a game such as a special symbol controlled by the main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208. FIG. 205 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 206 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the second big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 207 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to an advantageous gaming state generated according to the lottery results in the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery. FIG. 208 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the normal lottery on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 205, the main control board 4100 includes a first hit determination table 4501, a first hit symbol table 4502, a first hit variation time setting table 4503, and a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. A first lose time variation time setting table 4504 is stored in advance. Based on these tables 4501 to 4504, whether or not the lottery is determined in the first big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, and the variation time. Is determined. The first hit determination table 4501 shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability. The first winning symbol table 4502 shows the relationship between the big winning symbol random value and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185, and each of the big winning symbol random values divided into a plurality of groups. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol).

  The first hit time variation time setting table 4503 is used when the result of the first big hit lottery is a big hit or small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 1185 extracted. The first lost time changing time setting table 4504 is used when the result of the first big lottery lottery is lost and is extracted. The relationship between the random time for fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is shown. Note that the first lottery probability selection means 4505 performs processing for selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Although not shown, the first hit symbol table 4502 includes a probability variation big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, respectively. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determining means 4506 described later is selected.

  The main control board 4100 has a first hit determination for extracting a big hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generating means) when a winning to the first start port 2101 is detected by the first start port sensor 3524. Random number extracting means 4507 and first hit symbol random number extracting means 4508 for extracting big hit symbol random numbers are provided. Also, first variation time random number extraction means 4509 is provided for extracting variation time random numbers based on the determination random number and jackpot symbol random number. Further, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 4507, the first hit determination unit 4506 for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the first hit determination table 4501, and the first hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting unit 4508, the first stop symbol determining unit 4510 for determining the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185 using the first hit symbol table 4502 is provided. Yes.

  Further, when the random time random number extraction means 4509 extracts the random time for variation time and the first hit / fail determination means 4506 determines that it is a big hit, the first variation time random time setting table 4503 is used. When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined and the random number for variation time is extracted and the first hit / fail determination means 4506 determines that the variation is lost, the first variation time variation time setting table 4504 is determined. The first variation time determination means 4511 is provided for determining the variation time of the first special symbol using.

  Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special symbol display 1185 starts the variation of the first special symbol, and after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination means 4511 elapses, the first stop symbol determination is performed. Special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 for causing the variable symbol to stop at the stop symbol determined by the means 4510, a success / failure command relating to the presence / absence of the big hit determined by the first success / failure determination means 4506, and the first Command transmission means 4513 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the special symbol is provided.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when a winning to the first start port 2101 is detected by the first start port sensor 3524 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the first start memory number is counted and stored, and the first reserved digest means 4514 is provided for repeatedly displaying the first special symbol as many times as the start memory number. In other words, the first holding digesting means 4514 for waiting for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3524 is provided. The first hold digesting means 4514 will be described in more detail. The first hold digesting means 4514 is provided with a first hold control means 4514a and a first digestion control means 4514b. If a winning at the first start port 2101 is detected by the first start port sensor 3524 while the one special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the first start memory number must reach the upper limit value “4”. For example, the value of the first start memory number is increased by “1”, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is used as the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 ( In the uppermost storage area in FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing and the first first special symbol can be changed, the first digestion control unit 4514b sets the start memory number related to the first special symbol to “ If not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the first starting stored number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 206, the main control board 4100 includes a second hit determination table 4521, a second hit symbol table 4522, and a second hit variable time setting table 4523 as the configuration related to the second big hit lottery. , And a second loss time variation time setting table 4524 is stored in advance. Based on these tables 4521 to 4524, whether or not the lottery is selected in the second big lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol indicator 1186, and The variation time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description is omitted here.

  The main control board 4100 has second hit determination random number extraction means 4525 for extracting a big hit determination random number related to the second big hit lottery when the second start port sensor 2166 detects a winning at the second start port 2102. And second random number random number extracting means 4526 for extracting the big hit symbol random number for the second big hit lottery, and the second random number extracting unit for extracting the variable time based on the determination random number and the big hit symbol random number Means 4527 are provided. Further, when the big hit determination random number extraction means 4525 extracts the big hit determination random number, the second hit determination table 4521 using the second hit determination table 4521 and the second hit determination unit 4528 for determining whether or not the big hit is determined. When the big hit symbol random number extraction means 4526 extracts the big hit symbol random number, the second special symbol display unit 1186 uses the second special symbol display unit 1186 to determine the stop symbol in the second stop symbol determination unit 4529. Yes.

  Furthermore, when the random time for variation time is extracted by the random number extraction unit for second variation time 4527 and it is determined that the big hit is determined by the second success / failure determination unit 4528, the second variation time setting table 4523 is used. When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, and when the variation time random number is extracted and the second hit determination unit 4528 determines that the variation is lost, the second variation time variation time setting table 4524 is determined. The second variation time determining means 4530 is provided for determining the variation time of the second special symbol using the. Note that the second winning / failing determining means 4528 includes a winning restriction means 4528a, and restricts the “special big hit”, which is a big hit that does not give a specific profit to the player, so as not to occur.

  The special symbol variation control means 4512 starts the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol indicator 1186, and after the variation time determined by the second variation time determination unit 4530 has elapsed, the second stop symbol variation is performed. Fluctuation is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the determining means 4529. Further, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when the second starting port sensor 2166 detects a winning to the second starting port 2102 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit and the second starting memory number is counted and stored, and the second reserved digesting means 4531 is provided for repeatedly displaying the variation of the second special symbol by the starting memory number. In other words, the second reserved digesting means 4531 is provided to wait for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2166.

  The second hold digesting means 4531 will be described in more detail. The second hold digesting means 4531 is provided with a second hold control means 4531a and a second digestion control means 4531b. If a winning to the second start port 2102 is detected by the second start port sensor 2166 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second start memory number has reached the upper limit value “4”. If not, the value of the second start memory number is increased by “1”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and the extracted random numbers are used as the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. (See FIG. 198). On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing and the second second special symbol can be changed, the second digestion control unit 4531b sets the start memory number related to the second special symbol to “ If not “0”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start memory number [1], the second start memory number is decreased by “1”, and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 207, the main control board 4100 has five advantageous games for giving a game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 4506 or the second success / failure determination means 4528. State control means is provided. Here, in an advantageous gaming state, the winning door 2154 in the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 is opened to allow the game ball to be awarded to the big winning opening 2153, and the bell in the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 is set. The shape opening / closing piece 2142 is projected to allow the game ball to be won, and the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 or the first opening / closing winning prize is selected by either the specific profit giving means 4540 or the predetermined profit giving means 4541. The device 2103 is controlled to be opened.

  More specifically, the predetermined profit granting means 4541 has a first opening degree that allows several game balls (for example, 1 to 2) to barely win the opening time (protrusion time) per one of the belo-shaped intruder piece 2142. A predetermined profit is given to the player by setting the predetermined time and performing the protrusion / retraction operation of the tongue-shaped protrusion / depression piece 2142 at least once (in this example, twice). As a result, a predetermined number of game balls can be awarded to the first open / close prize-winning device 2103, but since the number that can be won is very small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit granting means 4540 has a second predetermined opening amount that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win with a certain amount of opening time per winning door 2154 in the second open / close winning device 2104. Time is given, and the opening / closing operation of the prize-winning door 2154 is performed more times (in this example, 7 times) than the number of opening / closing operations for giving a predetermined profit, thereby giving a specific profit to the player It is. As a result, a large number of game balls can be awarded to the big prize opening 2153, and the player can obtain a large profit.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 and a second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 4540, and a predetermined profit giving means 4541. As a means for giving a predetermined profit, a third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, a fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545, and a fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 are provided.

  The first advantageous gaming state generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is a so-called “probability variation big hit”, and the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / failing determining means 4528 is the first result. Occur. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 4540, and the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time by the high probability state setting means 4547. That is, a probability variation state with a high probability is assumed. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at high probability, 60 jackpot determination values that are determined to generate a jackpot gaming state are set out of 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498. The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 60/499. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, six jackpot determination values are set out of 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498, and the jackpot probability is 6/499.

  In the first advantageous game state, the first special symbol display unit 1548 or the second special symbol display unit 1186 causes the first special symbol display unit 1548 or the second special symbol display unit 1186 to change the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. While shortening, increase the frequency of opening / closing operation of the blade 2125 of the second start port 2102 (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number. As a result, the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 2102 is increased as compared with the normal time. In other words, the short-time gaming state is set.

  The second advantageous gaming state generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 is a so-called “ordinary big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / failing determining means 4528 is the second result. To do. In this win, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 4540 in the same way as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery. Remains a low probability. That is, the probability fluctuation state is not entered, and the normal probability is maintained. Even in the second advantageous gaming state, the time is reduced by the temporary short state setting means 4548 until the predetermined number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed after the specific profit is given. Become a gaming state, shorten the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and increase the frequency that the blade 2125 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) to increase the possession of the game ball Suppress.

  The third advantageous gaming state generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544 is a so-called “special big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit is given to the player by a predetermined profit giving means 4541 (a profit having a lower advantage than a specific profit). For the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, as in the first advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state is set. However, the short-time gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the state is not the probability variation state and is not the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 4549 is operated to generate the short-time gaming state. Yes.

  The fourth advantageous gaming state generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the fourth result. At this time, as in the third advantageous gaming state, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 4541. However, for the subsequent lottery, a new probability fluctuation state is not generated. Whether or not the short-time gaming state is added is determined based on the gaming state.

  The fifth advantageous gaming state generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the fifth result. At this time, giving a predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit granting means 4541 and giving a predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 4547 are the same as in the third advantageous gaming state. In the advantageous gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state is generated when not in the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 4549 is operated to generate the short-time gaming state.

  In this example, the winning ratios in the respective big wins are distributed differently in the case of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 and the second winning / failing determining means 4528. Specifically, in the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, that is, the probability fluctuation state in which both the probability fluctuation state and the fixed number of short-time gaming states are given. The big hit is set to 22% of the total big hit, and the second big hit generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543, that is, the normal big hit that is given a short time gaming state for a certain number of times without being given a probability variation state. It is set to 45%.

  Further, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, that is, the probability variation state and the special big hit to which the conditional short time gaming state is given is set to 11%, and the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545 is set. The fifth big hit generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 is set to 11%, which is a special big hit that is given a conditional short-time gaming state without being given a probability variation state. That is, the special jackpot to which the probability variation state and the conditional short-time game state are given is set to 11%.

  On the other hand, in the lottery result of the second win / fail determination means 4528, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is set to 44% of the entire big hit, and the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 generates the first big hit. The two big hits are set to 56%. The second hit / fail determining means 4528 is set so as not to generate a special big hit, that is, the third big hit, the fourth big hit and the fifth big hit. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent the probability fluctuation state from being terminated without giving a specific profit, and to suppress a significant decrease in gaming motivation due to sudden demotion.

  In addition, the ratio of the first big hit or the fifth big hit that gives a specific profit to the first big hit or the second big hit is higher in the second winning / decision determining means 4528. In the jackpot lottery by the first winning / decision determining means 4506, it is possible to limit the occurrence of jackpots to which a specific profit is given to some extent while opening the winning door 2154 in the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 relatively frequently. It becomes. On the other hand, in the big hit lottery by the second winning / decision determining means 4528 which is substantially effective in the short-time gaming state, there is a high possibility that a specific profit will be given. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 208, the main control board 4100 has, as a configuration related to the normal lottery (lottery for increasing the ease of winning the second start port 2102), a normal hit determination random number extraction means 4551, A normal hit determination table 4552 and a normal hit determination unit 4553 are provided. The normal hit determination random number extraction unit 4551 extracts a normal hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generation unit) when the gate sensor 2176 detects the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2107. Further, the normal hit determination table 4552 is divided into a high probability table and a normal probability table. In the high probability normal hit determination table, 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250 are stored. Of these, 250 determination values for normal hit are set, and the probability of normal hit is 250/251.

  On the other hand, in the normal normal hit determination table, one of the determination values for normal hit is set out of 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250, and the probability of normal hit is 1/251. ing. In the normal lottery at high probability, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the blade 2125 by the solenoid 2128 is set to 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is set to 3, and the interval between opening is set to 512 ms. Has been. On the other hand, in the normal lottery at the normal time, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.6 seconds on average, the opening time of the blade 2125 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set once.

  When the normal hit determination random number extraction unit 4551 extracts the normal hit determination random number, the normal hit determination unit 4553 extracts the extracted random number and the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 4552. Are determined to be normal hits if they match. At this time, the gaming state determination means 4554 determines whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state, that is, a short-time gaming state, and if it is a short-time gaming state, a table with a high probability is selected and the short-time gaming is selected. If not, the normal table is selected. For this reason, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, when the short-time gaming state ends for a certain number of times, the table at the high probability is switched from the table at the normal time. ing.

  In addition, when the normal lottery determination unit 4553 determines whether or not the normal lottery is determined on the main control board 4100, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner, and the change time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the elapse of time, a normal symbol variation control means 4555 for displaying the result of the success / failure is provided. In addition, when the normal hit determination unit 4553 determines that the normal hit is determined, the release control unit 4556 is configured to open the blade 2125 after stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol and make it easy to win the game ball in the second start port 2102. Is provided.

[4-1A. Game contents by main board]
Next, game contents by the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is moved to the game panel 1150 when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game area 1100 is placed in front of the game area 1100, and a game with a game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2400 depending on the driving strength.

  The game ball driving strength is determined by detecting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 with the rotation position detection sensor 512 and then using the shot control unit 4120 with the shot control unit 4120 based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512. The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled so that it can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2400 flows down from the substantially right and left center to the right side of the center accessory 2400, the game ball is guided to the right area of the center accessory 2400. When a game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2400 enters the gate portion 2107 arranged at the lower right of the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176, the normal hit determination as the normal lottery result Random numbers are extracted. Based on the normal hit determination random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol indicator 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is displayed in a variable manner (the normal symbol indicator 1189 consisting of one LED emits light in red, green and orange alternately. ), And a normal symbol based on a random number for normal hit determination (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1189 is displayed in red or green) ). The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the normal hit determination table 4552 (ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table).

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). When a normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of blades 2125 that close the second start port 2102 expands for a predetermined opening time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). The game ball can be awarded to the second start port 2102 by repeating the number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the blade 2125 at the second start port 2102 are changed according to the first hit determination random number or the second hit determination random number (special lottery result). As a special lottery result, when “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability short time per hour, etc.)” is extracted, the normal time will be changed in order to change the fluctuation time and expansion time to a short time. The determination table 4552 can be replaced from a normal table to a high probability table.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2176 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is determined, the normal hit determination random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2176 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of random numbers for determining normal hits (also referred to as the number of holds) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and the number of pending is displayed. It is like that. When the number of holdings exceeds four, the normal hit determination random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2176 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2400 is moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center accessory 2400 by the guide rolling surface 2301e of the side decoration unit 2300. It is like that. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2105 of the winning apparatus unit 2100 arranged below the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3522, the main control board 4100 is based on the detection signal. Then, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  Note that the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 wins the general prize opening 2105, the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, the first opening / closing winning apparatus 2103, and the second opening / closing winning apparatus 2104. If not, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, even if a game ball wins any of the general winning opening 2105, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first opening / closing winning apparatus 2103, and the second opening / closing winning apparatus 2104 (large winning opening 2153), The winning game balls are discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned into the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2400 enters the warp entrance 2402a that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2400, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2403a of the shelf 2403 of the center accessory 2400. It has become. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 2403a rolls in the left-right direction.

  By the way, when the game ball rolling on the stage 2403a passes through the chance entrance 2403b formed in the center in the left-right direction and enters the chance passage 2404d formed in the rear shelf cover 2404, the game ball is arranged immediately above the first start port 2101. The chance exit 2403c is released into the game area 1100, and the game ball is received into the first start port 2101 with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3524, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2403a have a high probability. The start opening 2101 and the first open / close winning device 2103 can be received.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate portion 2107 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of blades 2125 that close the second start port 2102 is closed. When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2166 when the winning becomes possible after being expanded for a predetermined time, the main control board 4100 or the like is used. Then, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3524 and the second start port sensor 2166, the first start A predetermined first hit determination random number is extracted at the port 2101, and a predetermined second hit determination random number is extracted at the second start port 2102. Then, based on the extracted hit determination random number, after the special symbol variable display displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, The special symbol corresponding to the extracted winning determination random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the winning door 2154 of the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104 has a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) that opens and closes at the time of occurrence occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2153 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2153, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the gate portion 2107. In 1186, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the first start port sensor 3524. When detected by the second starting port sensor 2166, the first symbol extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3524 and the second starting port sensor 2166 until the special symbol variation display is possible. The random number for hit judgment and the random number for second hit judgment are stored and the display is suspended, and the stored number of the random numbers for hit judgment is stored in the first special figure. So as to display the stored display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of holdings exceeds four, the extracted random numbers for hit determination are discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first hit determination random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3524 and the second start port sensor 2166 and the second hit determination random number are determined in advance. By collating with predetermined predetermined hit determination tables 4501 and 4521 (also referred to as special symbol variation pattern tables), the hit determination random number is any one of “lost”, “small hit”, and “big hit”. In addition, it is also determined whether “big hit” is “2R big hit” or “15R big hit”. In addition, the hit determination tables 4501 and 4521 can also determine “no short hit at the time of probability change”, “high probability hit”, “hit at the short time”, “short hit at the time of probability change”, and the like.

  Then, the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (the special lottery result is), In the case of “small hit”, the main control board 4100 retreats the tongue-shaped protrusion / depression piece 2142 of the first opening / closing prize winning device 2103 as a protruding state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, when the extracted first hit determination random number or second hit determination random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the winning door 2154 of the second opening / closing prize winning device 2104, and then determines a predetermined value. An opening / closing pattern that closes the winning door 2154 when a time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2153 and any of the conditions for winning is satisfied. The opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for “2R big hit”, 15 rounds for “15R big hit”, respectively, An advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated. For the “big hit” after the predetermined number of rounds, the hit determination table is changed to a high probability table according to the extracted hit determination random number. Further, the variable time setting tables 4503, 4504, 4523, and 4524 are appropriately changed in order to set the time-short state or cancel the time-short state according to the hit determination random number.

[4-2. Functional configuration for games on peripheral control board]
Next, a functional configuration relating to a game including a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a common decorative symbol sequence on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to effects on the peripheral control board (mainly the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150).

  As shown in FIG. 209, when the control information command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received by the command receiving means 4560, the peripheral control board 4010 of this example controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on this control information command. Various functions are provided. That is, as a table for effects corresponding to the first big hit lottery, a first hit effect mode table 4561 and a first lose time effect mode table 4562 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4561 and 4562, The production mode in the step production and the development production is determined.

  First, the production mode tables 4561 and 4562 will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 4561 is used in the case of big hit (or small hit), and shows the relationship between the random number for determining the effect (described later) and the effect mode (in this case, the effect pattern in the step effect and the development effect). It is shown. In addition, the first losing effect mode table 4562 is a table used in the case of losing, and shows the relationship between the effect determining random number and the effect pattern.

  This peripheral control board 4010 is provided with first effect random number extraction means 4563 for extracting effect determination random numbers from a random counter (not shown), and first effect mode determination means 4564 for determining effect patterns. . When receiving the control command via the command receiving means 4560, the first effect mode determining means 4564 extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extracting means 4563 and the success / failure command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of indicating a small hit), an effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect effect mode table 4561 at the time of first hit, while the success / failure command is determined. In the case of indicating a loss, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect mode table 4562 at the time of the first loss.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 4564 is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 4565. The first effect display control means 4565 reads the images of those effects from the image storage means (character ROM 4150d) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  On the other hand, a first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 is provided as a functional configuration related to the production of the first decorative symbol. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 4560, the first decorative symbol variation control unit 4566 reads and varies the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and the variation included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, etc. (that is, the lottery result).

  In the above description, the effects related to the first big hit lottery have been described, but the peripheral control board 4010 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing effects related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, a second winning effect mode table 4567 and a second losing effect mode table 4568 are stored in advance as the effect tables corresponding to the second big hit lottery. These tables 4567 and 4568 are stored in advance. Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. Since the production mode tables 4567 and 4568 have the same configuration as the production mode tables 4561 and 4562 corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 4569, the second effect mode determination means 4570, the second effect display control means 4571, and the second decorative symbol variation control. Although means 4572 is provided, these configurations also have the same function as the functional configuration corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 is provided with decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 4573 and big hit display means 4574. The decorative symbol sequence variation display means 4573 is based on the outputs of the first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 and the second decorative symbol variation control means 4572, or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560. While changing the symbol sequence, the common decorative symbol sequence is sequentially stopped based on the variation time and the success / failure command included in the control command (that is, the lottery result). In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stopped symbols) that have already stopped on the active line at the stage before the last stopped symbol sequence that is stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol sequences is a specific decorative symbol When the above combination is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the already stopped decorative symbol as the reach formation symbol.

  The jackpot display means 4574 is related to the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when the “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”. After stopping the variation of the common decorative design sequence, it is displayed that “big hit”. In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit, it is not displayed as “winning”, and the common decorative design column After the change is stopped, the effect related to the lottery is finished.

[5. Characteristic production operation]
Hereinafter, characteristic presentation operations in the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the peripheral control board 4100 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4100 appropriately executes a characteristic rendering operation.

[5-1. Effective symbol identification display effect]
[Various tables for decorative designs]
FIG. 210 shows the decorative symbol arrangement table T1 used when the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen. The decorative symbol arrangement table T1 is stored in advance by the peripheral board 4140, and is variably displayed on the display screen when a game ball enters the starting port and a special symbol is drawn by the main board 4000.

  The decorative symbol arrangement table T1 includes a first reel symbol column T11, a second reel symbol column T12, and a third reel symbol column T13.

  The first reel symbol column T11 stores a decorative symbol that stops first among the decorative symbols. The second reel symbol column T12 stores the ornament symbol that stops last among the ornament symbols. The third reel symbol field T13 stores a decorative symbol that stops at the timing between the first and last among the decorative symbols.

  The decorative symbol patterns stored in the first reel symbol column T11, the second reel symbol column T12, and the third reel symbol column T13 are, for example, “1”, “2”, “3”, “A”, “ It does not have regularity such as “B”, “C”, etc., but is constituted by a symbol arrangement without regularity. In addition, the decorative symbols stored in the respective columns T11 to T13 are in a symbol form utilizing the motif of the gaming machine, and the role of the symbols is difficult to recognize by the player at a glance. As described above, the decorative symbols stored in the columns T11 to T13 are variably displayed independently when a special symbol is selected.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 210, as a result of the decorative symbols in each of the columns T11 to T13 being variably displayed independently, for example, on the display screen, in the first reel symbol column T11, a cobra symbol indicating a cobra, a replay symbol indicating a replay, and It is shown that the stop symbol area T111 composed of an oasis symbol indicating an oasis may stop, and the second reel symbol column T12 is composed of a watermelon symbol indicating a watermelon, a carpet symbol indicating a carpet, and an oasis symbol. In the third reel symbol field T13, there is a stop symbol region T131 composed of a watermelon symbol, a turban symbol indicating a turban, and a cherry symbol indicating a cherry. It has been shown that it may stop.

  FIG. 211 shows a decorative symbol role table T2 in which the role of the decorative symbol is defined. The decorative symbol role table T2 is stored in advance by the peripheral board 4140, and is referred to when the decorative symbol array table T1 is variably displayed on the display screen.

  The decorative symbol role table T2 includes a combination effective symbol column T21, a specific time single symbol effective symbol column T22, and a template effective symbol column T23.

  In the combination effective symbol column T21, when the decorative symbols stored in the first reel symbol column T11, the second reel symbol column T12, and the third reel symbol column T13 are stopped, a role is defined for the combination of the stopped symbols. Stored combinations of decorative symbols are stored.

  In the specific time single effective symbol field T22, when the decorative symbols stored in the first reel symbol field T11, the second reel symbol field T12, and the third reel symbol field T13 are stopped at a specific time, the stop symbol alone is displayed. Stores decorative symbols with a defined role.

  When the decorative symbols stored in the first reel symbol column T11 and the third reel symbol column T13 are stopped, the stop symbol is displayed on the effective line (for example, vertical, horizontal, diagonal, etc.) in the temporary symbol effective symbol column T23. ) Stores decorative symbols that are produced when the operation stops.

  Accordingly, in the case of FIG. 211, the stop symbol (or the decorative symbol being changed) at the time when the first reel is stopped is any decorative symbol (for example, red 7) in the combination effective symbol column T21, or a single-time effective symbol at a specific time. When the decorative design (for example, cherry) in the column T22 is included, the decorative design is distinguished from other decorative designs by applying the present invention to the decorative design. In addition, when the stop symbol at the time when the first reel is stopped includes a decorative symbol (for example, replay) in the Tempe valid symbol field T23, the decorative symbol is not identified and displayed at the time of the first reel stop, but the third reel is stopped. If the tempering is performed at that time, the decorative design on the first reel and the third reel is identified and displayed separately from the other decorative designs by applying the present invention.

[Identification mode]
FIG. 212 shows a front view of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of variation display of decorative symbols. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, and a third reel display area R3.

  The first reel display area R1 is an area for sequentially displaying the decorative symbols stored in the first reel symbol column T11 on the display screen D1 or D2.

  The second reel display area R2 is an area for sequentially displaying the decorative symbols stored in the second reel symbol column T12 on the display screen D1 or D2.

  The third reel display area R3 is an area for sequentially displaying the decorative drawings stored in the third reel symbol column T13 on the display screen D1 or D2.

  Accordingly, in the case of FIG. 212, the replay symbol, the turban symbol, and the scorpion symbol among the decorative symbols stored in the first reel symbol field T11 are variably displayed in the first reel display area R1, and then stopped. It is shown that it is displayed. In the second reel display area R2, it is shown that the decorative symbols stored in the second reel symbol column T12 are variably displayed at high speed. The third reel display area R3 shows that the decorative symbols stored in the third reel symbol column T13 are displayed at a low speed, and the watermelon symbol, turban symbol, replay symbol, and oasis symbol are displayed. It is shown that the display is fluctuating.

  FIG. 213 shows a perspective view of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of variation display of decorative symbols. The display screen D1 is installed on the front side when viewed from the player side, and the display screen D2 is installed on the back side when viewed from the player side. That is, the display screens D1 and D2 are so-called double liquid crystal screens. On the display screen D1, an effective symbol related to a specific effect display among the decorative symbols is displayed. In addition, on the display screen D2, invalid symbols other than the valid symbols related to the specific effect display among the decorative symbols are displayed.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 213, the turban symbol which is an effective symbol is displayed on the display screen D1 in the first reel display area R1, and the replay symbol and the scorpion symbol which are invalid symbols are displayed on the display screen D2. Since the replay symbol is treated as an effective symbol when a temper is played, the replay symbol is displayed on the display screen D1 as an effective symbol during the tempering. In the second reel display area R2, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a speed that is difficult for the player to recognize. In the third reel display area R3, the decorative symbols are displayed in a low-speed manner at a speed that can be recognized by the player, and the turban symbols and oasis symbols, which are valid symbols, are displayed on the display screen D1. The watermelon symbol and replay symbol which are symbols are displayed on the display screen D2.

[Identification display processing flow]
FIG. 214 shows a processing procedure of identification display processing performed by the peripheral control board 4010. The peripheral control board 4010 receives a change pattern command from the main control board 4100 when a game ball enters the start port and the special design is changed by the main control board 4100, and follows the processing procedure shown in FIG. The identification display process is executed.

  First, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern command (HPC) from the main control board 4100 has been received (Rec) (SP1).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP1, the peripheral control board 4010 determines (Judge) an effective symbol related to a specific effect display among the decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol (SP2).

  Next, in the first reel display area R1 to the third reel display area R3, the peripheral control board 4010 changes the decorative symbol (DecoPat) stored in the first reel symbol column T1 to the third reel symbol column T3 (Change). ) Is started (SP3).

  Peripheral control board 4010, among the decorative symbols variably displayed in first reel display region R1 to third reel display region R3, the variation speed of the decorative symbol variably displayed in first reel display region R1 (No. 1 Real). Is a low speed fluctuation (Low) (SP4).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol displayed in the first reel display area R1 fluctuates.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP4, the decorative design displayed in the first reel display area R1 with the low-speed fluctuation is in front of the effective design when viewed from the player side. On the other hand, the variable display is displayed on the display screen D1 on the side (Epat = Disp). On the other hand, the invalid symbol is displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side as viewed from the player side (InvPat = Disp), and then stopped (Stop). (SP5).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 displays the decorative symbols variably displayed in the third reel display region R3 (No. 3 Real) among the decorative symbols variably displayed in the first reel display region R1 to the third reel display region R3. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation speed is a low speed fluctuation (Low) (SP6).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until the changing speed of the decorative symbol that is displayed variably in the third reel display area R3 changes to a low speed.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP6, it sees the effective symbols from the player side among the decorative symbols displayed at low speed in the third reel display area R3. On the other hand, the variable display is displayed on the display screen D1 on the side (Epat = Disp). On the other hand, the invalid symbol is displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side as viewed from the player side (InvPat = Disp), and then stopped (Stop). (SP7).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not a template effective symbol such as a replay is a template (TP) on the effective line (SP8).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it moves to step SP11.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, whether or not the tempered effective symbol (TPPat) is displayed on the front display screen D1 as viewed from the player is determined. Is determined (SP9).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it displays the tempai effective symbol (TPPat) on the display screen D1 (FrontDisp) on the near side as viewed from the player (SP10).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP9, the variation speed of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the second reel display region R2 (No. 2 Real) is low-speed variation (Low). It is determined whether or not (SP11).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until the changing speed of the decorative symbol displayed in the second reel display area R2 fluctuates.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP11, it can be seen from the player side that the effective symbols are displayed from among the decorative symbols displayed in the second reel display area R2 with low speed fluctuation. On the other hand, the display is changed on the display screen D1 (EPat = Disp). On the other hand, the invalid symbol is changed on the display screen D2 on the back as viewed from the player side (InvPat = Disp) and then stopped (Stop). ) (SP12), and this process ends.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the decorative symbol pattern arrangement is not regular or the role of the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize at a glance, the player can visually recognize the state (for example, By distinguishing the decorative symbols in the display areas R1 to R3 at the time of low speed fluctuation or at the time of stopping), it is possible to distinguish the effective symbols from the invalid symbols and easily display the effective symbols. Thereby, the player can guess and enjoy the stop symbol even if the gaming machine has no regularity and the role is difficult to recognize at first glance.

[5-2. Cobra chance production]
[Various display screens at Cobra Chance]
FIG. 215 is a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when the cobra chance transition condition that is the specific game is satisfied. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, and a third reel display area R3.

  The first reel display area R1 is an area for sequentially displaying the decorative symbols stored in the first reel symbol column T11 (see FIG. 210) on the display screen D1 or D2.

  The second reel display area R2 is an area for sequentially displaying the decorative symbols stored in the second reel symbol column T12 (see FIG. 210) on the display screen D1 or D2. When a predetermined specific symbol (here, a cobra symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second reel display area R2, the specific symbol is displayed separately from the decorative symbols and images displayed in the other display areas. Is done. When this specific symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display area (here, the second reel display area R2), a cobra chance transition condition is satisfied.

  The third reel display area R3 is an area for sequentially displaying the decorative symbols stored in the third reel symbol column T13 (see FIG. 210) on the display screen D1 or D2.

  The character C1 is a character image that is highlighted and distinguished from other decorative symbols and images when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the second reel display area R2 is a specific symbol (here, a cobra symbol). It is. The character C1 is normally displayed as a fixed configuration diagram of the decorative design at normal times, but an animation is displayed so that the character C1 exits from the decorative design and faces the player at the specific time. Specifically, for example, the character C1 is enlarged and displayed on the display screen D1 on the near side as viewed from the player when specified. In addition, other decorative designs, images, and the like at this time are displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side as viewed from the player.

  The afterimage C11 is an image for emphasizing and displaying the character C1, and when the animation display is performed such that the character C1 moves out of the decorative design and moves toward the player, the movement and display are emphasized. In order to do so, it is displayed as an afterimage of the character C1 on the display screen D2 on the back side as viewed from the player.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 215, when the cobra symbol predetermined as the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the second reel display area R2, the cobra as the character in the cobra symbol escapes from the cobra symbol and faces the player. As the animation is displayed, the afterimage of the cobra is also displayed. As a result, the cobra is highlighted.

  FIG. 216 shows a screen configuration diagram of display screens D1 and D2 for notifying the shift of the cobra chance that is a specific game. The display screens D1 and D2 include a notification display C2.

  The notification display C2 is a message image displayed before the transition to the cobra chance after the cobra chance transition condition is satisfied, and is a message notifying the content of the cobra chance and the transition to the cobra chance.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 216, the notification display C2 “Cobra Chance” is enlarged and displayed on the display screen D1 or D2, thereby indicating that the cobra chance, which is a specific game, is shifted from now on.

  FIG. 217 shows a screen configuration diagram of the initial display screens D1 and D2 that have shifted to the cobra chance that is the specific game. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a gauge G1.

  The gauge G1 is an image displayed on the display screen D1 or D2 between the transition to the cobra chance and the end of the cobra chance, and the development effect (for example, reach effect) performed after the cobra chance ends. It is an image that suggests reliability. The gauge G1 is provided on the condition that a specific symbol (for example, a cobra symbol) is stopped in any one of the first reel display region R1, the second reel display region R2, and the third reel display region R3. The meters in the gauge G1 are increased and displayed by the number of specific symbols that have been stopped.

  Accordingly, in the case of FIG. 217, since the screen configuration is from the transition to the cobra chance that is the specific game until the end, the gauge G1 is displayed on the display screen D1 or D2, and after the transition to the cobra chance. Since it is a very early stage, the specific symbol has not yet stopped in the display usage area of the first reel display area R1, the second reel display area R2, or the third reel display area R3. The meter in gauge G1 is shown to be zero.

  FIG. 218 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when the gauge increases after the transition to the cobra chance that is the specific game. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a gauge G1 as in FIG. 217, and are further composed of a character C111 here.

  As described above, the gauge G1 is an image that is displayed between the transition to the cobra chance and the end of the cobra chance, and the reliability of the development effect (for example, the reach effect) that is performed after the end of the cobra chance. It is an image that suggests. Further, the gauge G1 is provided on the condition that a specific symbol (for example, a cobra symbol) is stopped in any one of the first reel display region R1, the second reel display region R2, and the third reel display region R3. The number of meters in the gauge G1 is increased and displayed by the number of specific symbols that have been stopped.

  The character C111 is displayed when the decoration symbol stopped and displayed in any one of the first reel display region R1, the second reel display region R2, and the third reel display region R3 is a specific symbol (here, a cobra symbol). This is a character image displayed with emphasis. The character C111 is normally displayed as a configuration diagram that is fixed as a decorative symbol in normal times, but an animation is displayed so that the character C111 starts to move in the decorative symbols when specified. Specifically, for example, the character C111 is enlarged and displayed on the display screen D1 on the near side as viewed from the player when specified.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 218, the gauge G1 is displayed on the display screen D1 or D2 because the screen configuration is from the transition to the cobra chance that is the specific game until the end. Further, since a certain time has passed since the transition to the cobra chance, for example, the specific symbol (here, the cobra symbol) is stopped in the third reel display area R3, so that the meter in the gauge G1 is increased and displayed. It has been shown that.

[Cobra Chance Migration Process Flow]
FIG. 219 shows a processing procedure of cobra chance transition processing performed by the peripheral control board 4010. The peripheral control board 4010 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 when a game ball enters the start port and the special design is changed by the main control board 4100, and follows the processing procedure shown in FIG. Execute the cobra chance transition process.

  First, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not a variation pattern command (HPC) from the main control board 4100 has been received (Rec) (SP21).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP21, the peripheral control board 4010 starts the change (Change) of the decorative symbol (DecoPat) corresponding to the special symbol (SP22).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 has (No. 2) in the second reel display area R2 of the second reel that is stopped last among the decorative symbols stopped in the order of the first reel, the third reel, and the second reel. 2 Real), it is determined whether or not a predetermined specific symbol (for example, cobra symbol) (SpecPat) is stopped (SP23).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it moves to step SP21. On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it shifts to a cobra chance (SpecGm) (SP24).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 shifts to the cobra chance, the effect of the cobra chance starts the decoration pattern change (DecoPat = Change) without any pending digestion (SP25).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the specific symbol (SpecPat) has stopped in the first reel display area R1 (No. 1 Real) (SP26).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, the meter in the gauge G1 (see FIG. 218) displayed on the display screen D1 or D2 as an effect in the cobra chance is stopped in the first reel display area R1. Increase by the number of symbols (SP27).

  In contrast, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP26, the peripheral control board 4010 proceeds to step SP28.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the specific symbol (SpecPat) has stopped in the third reel display area R3 (No. 3 Real) (SP28).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, as in the process of step SP27, the meter in the gauge G1 is cumulatively increased by the number of specific symbols stopped in the third reel display area R3 (Increment). (SP29).

  In contrast, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP28, the peripheral control board 4010 proceeds to step SP30.

  The peripheral control board 4010 finally determines whether or not the specific symbol (SpecPat) has stopped in the second reel display area R2 (No. 2 Real) (SP30).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, as in the process of step SP27, the meter in the gauge G1 is cumulatively increased (Increment) by the number of specific symbols stopped in the second reel display area R3. (SP31).

  In contrast, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP30, the peripheral control board 4010 proceeds to step SP32.

  The peripheral control board 4010, after performing a series of processing of fluctuation and stop of the first reel to the third reel, determines whether or not the decorative symbol after the transition to cobra chance has been performed for five fluctuations (Comp) (SP32).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it moves to step SP25 and repeats the above-described variation of the decorative design.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP32, it determines whether it is time to perform the development effect (Dev) (SP33).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it is time to perform the development effect.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP33, the peripheral control board 4010 executes (DevDir) the content development effect according to the reliability indicated by the meter finally stored in the gauge G1 (DevDir) SP34), this process ends.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the cobra chance that is a specific game is not an effect aimed at aligning the big hit symbol, it is in the first stop reel (here, the first reel display area R1). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest about the production at the stage where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as described above, the cobra chance is not an effect aimed at aligning the jackpot symbol, so the reliability of the effect itself is not predetermined, and therefore the initial stage of the effect (the first stop reel) It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating even at the stage before the decorative pattern stops.

  Also, the cobra chance is an effect that the gauge G1 adds as long as the specific symbol stops within the final stop reel (here, the second reel display area R2) from the first stop reel. You can be interested in the stop pattern of all reels.

[5-3. Scorpion mode production]
[Various display screens in Scorpion mode]
FIG. 220 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when the transition condition for the scorpion mode, which is the specific mode, is satisfied. The display screens D1 and D2 here are composed of a background image BG11 and a mode transition notification image C21.

  The background image BG11 is a background image after being switched from the background image that has been displayed on the display screen D1 or D2 until the scorpion mode transition condition is satisfied, and is a background image corresponding to the scorpion mode. . Here, the background image BG11 includes three door images.

  The mode transition notification image C21 is an image displayed on the display screen D1 or D2 when the transition condition of the scorpion mode is established and the background image is switched to the background image BG11 corresponding to the scorpion mode described above. It is an image which notifies a player that it changed to Scorpion mode. Here, the mode transition notification image C21 is a character image that notifies the transition to the scorpion mode “scorpion mode”.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 220, the background image BG11 corresponding to the scorpion mode is displayed on the display screen D1 or D2 when the transition condition for the scorpion mode, which is the specific mode, is satisfied, and at the same time, a mode called “entering the scorpion mode” It is shown that the transition notification image C21 is displayed on the display screen D1 or D2.

  FIG. 221 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of mission notification in the scorpion mode which is the specific mode. The display screens D1 and D2 here are composed of a mission notification image C22.

  The mission notification image C22 is an image for notifying the player of the contents of the mission in the scorpion mode.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 221, the mission notification image C22 “Defeat 10 scorpions” is displayed on the display screen D1 or D2, indicating that the mission in the scorpion mode defeats 10 scorpions. Has been.

  FIG. 222 shows a screen configuration diagram of initial display screens D1 and D2 in the scorpion mode, which is a specific mode. The display screens D1 and D2 here are composed of a target display image C23 and a button press suggestion image C24.

  The target display image C23 is an image showing a target value and a current situation for clearing the mission according to the mission content in the scorpion mode.

  The button press suggestion image C24 is an image that suggests to the player that the effect that immediately starts is a button press effect.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 222, since the target display image C23 of “0/10” is displayed on the display screen D1 or D2, the target value for clearing the mission in the scorpion mode which is the specific mode is “ Since “10 animals” and the effect of pressing the button has not yet started, it is indicated that the current situation is “0 animals”. Further, since the button pressing suggestion image C24 is displayed on the display screen D1 or D2, it is indicated that the button pressing effect is performed after this.

  FIG. 223 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when the button is pressed in the scorpion mode which is the specific mode. The display screens D1 and D2 here are composed of attack target images C25.

  The attack target image C25 is an image for making the number and timing of button pressing irregular and unclear in the effect of pressing the button in the scorpion mode, and uses the display screens D1 and D2 that are double liquid crystals. The background image BG11 is an image that appears to jump out of any one of the three doors and attack the player, and the player will be concentrated on the operation of pressing the button. It is an image.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 223, it is shown that the attack target image C25 pops out from any one of the three doors of the background image BG11 and attacks the player. In order to counterattack the attack target image C25 that the player has faced, the player needs to press a button at an appropriate timing.

  FIG. 224 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when the mission fails in the effect of pressing the button in the scorpion mode, which is the specific mode. The display screens D1 and D2 here are composed of a mission failure display image C26.

  In the mission failure display image C26, in the effect of pressing the button in the scorpion mode, the attack target image C25 needs to be countered by pressing the button at an appropriate timing. This is an image displayed when the attack target image C25 cannot be counterattacked due to the case or the case where the button is not pressed in the first place.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 224, the mission failure display image C26 indicating that the mission has failed is displayed because the attack target image C25 cannot be countered because the button cannot be pressed at an appropriate timing. It is shown.

  FIG. 225 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when the mission is successful in the effect of pressing the button in the scorpion mode. The display screens D1 and D2 here are composed of a target reflection display image C27.

  The target reflection display image C27 is an image showing the current situation and target value reflecting the success of the mission.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 225, since the button can be pressed at an appropriate timing, the attack target image C25 can be countered and the target display image C23 of “0/10 animals” is initially displayed. As a result, it is shown that the target reflection display image C27 reflecting that the mission was successful is displayed.

[Scorpion mode transition processing flow]
FIG. 226 shows a processing procedure of scorpion mode transition processing performed by the peripheral control board 4010. The peripheral control board 4010 receives a change pattern command from the main control board 4100 when a game ball enters the start port and the special design is changed by the main control board 4100, and follows the processing procedure shown in FIG. Execute scorpion mode transition processing.

  First, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not a variation pattern command (HPC) from the main control board 4100 has been received (Rec) (SP41).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP41, it triggers a stage change (ST = CG) for switching the background image displayed on the display screens D1 and D2 to another background image. It is determined whether or not (SP42).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP44. On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it determines whether or not to perform a roulette effect (RollDir) for selecting any one stop image from the stop images after the decorative design fluctuates. Then, when performing the roulette effect, it is determined whether or not the roulette is stopped and selected in the scorpion image among the stopped images in the roulette effect (SP43).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it moves to step SP41. In contrast, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it shifts to the scorpion mode (SpecMode) (SP44).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 shifts to the scorpion mode, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not to change the decoration symbol (Deco = Change) after the transition to the scorpion mode (SP45).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it will wait until the decorative design changes.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP45, it performs a button press effect (Dir) as an effect in the scorpion mode (SP46).

  The peripheral control board 4010 executes the effect by randomly setting the number and timing at which the scorpion pattern attacks the player in the effect of pressing the button. The peripheral control board 4010 controls the effective period of pressing the button very limitedly when the scorpion pattern attacks the player, and comes when the button is not pressed in a timely manner. When an attack is received from the scorpion and the button is pressed in a timely manner, an effect is performed so that the scorpion can be countered.

  The peripheral control board 4010 performs the above-described effect of pressing the button every time the decoration symbol changes, and determines whether or not the game (GmNum) related to the effect of pressing the button has been consumed (SP47). ).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 proceeds to step SP45 and continues the game related to the effect of pressing the button until the specified number of games is reached.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP47, it ends this process.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, with respect to the effect of pressing the button in the scorpion mode, which is the specific mode, the number of times the button is pressed, the timing, and the effect period are specified at random, and the number, timing, and effect specified at random By performing the effect of pressing the button based on the period, an unpredictable button pressing operation can be provided, and the player can be concentrated on the button pressing operation sometime.

  The effect of pressing the button is performed on the display screens D1 and D2 using the double liquid crystal, and the scorpion pattern is displayed from the back side (D2) to the front side (D1), so the scorpion is actually displayed on the display screen D1. In addition, the player can be given an illusion of jumping out of D2 and attacking, and the player can be terrified, and the player can concentrate on the operation of pressing the button.

  In addition, because the button press production is in a situation where it is not known when the scorpion will attack, the player can always have a sense of tension during the button press production, and the player can press the button at any time. Can focus on.

[5-4. Other effects of Scorpion mode]
Also, in order for the player to perform the button pressing operation, the decoration pattern must be changed. Therefore, in order to perform the button pressing operation, the player must always fire the game ball and perform the operation of entering the game ball into the starting port. As a result, the effect of pressing the button can improve the operating rate of the hall.

[5-5 Lip ream chance production]
[Various display screens for Lip chances]
FIG. 227 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of the lip consecutive chance transition which is a specific effect. Here, the display screens D1 and D2 display a warning effect that suggests the transition to the rep series chance. In the sign production, an effect is given to give the player a feeling of ambition not knowing whether or not to move to a lip series opportunity.

  The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, and a third reel display area R3.

  The first reel display area R1 is a display area in which the decorative design is variably displayed by rotating the first reel and then the rotation of the first reel is stopped and the decorative design is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first reel display area R1, the watermelon symbol is displayed in the upper part, the replay symbol R11 is displayed in the middle part, and the seven symbols are stopped in the lower part.

  The third reel display area R3 is a display area in which the decorative design is variably displayed by rotating the third reel, and then the rotation of the third reel is stopped after the first reel to stop and display the decorative design. Here, in the third reel display area R3, an oasis symbol is displayed in the upper part, a replay symbol R31 is displayed in the middle part, and a cobra symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower part.

  The second reel display area R2 is a display area for rotating and displaying the decorative symbols by rotating the second reel and then stopping and displaying the decorative symbols by stopping the rotation of the second reel after the third reel. Here, in the second reel display area R2, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the first reel and the third reel are stopped and displayed on the active line. Move slowly to display. The second reel display area R2 displays a button press instruction symbol R22 below.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 227, the replay symbol R11 is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the first reel, and the replay symbol R31 is also stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the third reel that has stopped. It is shown. Moreover, it is shown that the sign production of the rep continuation chance which is a specific production is performed by having tempered. In the indication effect, it is shown that the first reel and the third reel are split on both sides of the screen and displayed on the back display screen D2, and the second reel is displayed on the front display screen D1. Also, in the prelude effect, an effect is given in which the lip continuous chance symbol R21 moves from the upper side to the lower side while rotating at a low speed on the second reel, and the lip continuous chance symbol R21 does not know whether it stops in the middle stage, Further, it is shown that a button press instruction symbol R22 for determining whether to stop or not is displayed.

  FIG. 228 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of determining the lip consecutive chance transition which is a specific effect. On this display screens D1 and D2, a decision effect indicating that it has been decided to shift to the rep series chance is displayed. In the decision effect, an effect is given in which the transition of the rep series chance is confirmed and the player is satisfied.

  The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a rep series chance symbol R21.

  The Lip consecutive chance symbol R21 is enlarged and displayed on the display screen D1 on the near side as viewed from the player.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 228, it is shown that the lip consecutive chance symbol R21 is displayed in an enlarged manner, so that the player can easily recognize that the transition to the rep continuous chance, which is a specific effect, is made.

  FIG. 229 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of the rep consecutive chance that is the specific effect. In this case, the display screens D1 and D2 display rep consecutive chances. In the lip series chance, an effect is produced in which the first reel to the third reel are rotated a specified number of times without being suspended.

  The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, and a third reel display area R3.

  The first reel display area R1 is a display area in which the first reel is rotated and the decorative symbols on the first reel are variably displayed, and then the first reel is stopped and the decorative symbols on the first reel are stopped and displayed. is there.

  In the third reel display area R3, after the third reel is rotated to display the decorative symbols on the third reel in a variable manner, the third reel is stopped and the ornament on the third reel is stopped after the stop of the first reel. This is a display area where symbols are stopped and displayed.

  In the second reel display area R2, after the second reel is rotated to display the decorative symbols on the second reel in a variable manner, the second reel is stopped after the third reel is stopped to decorate the second reel. This is a display area where symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 229, the background image corresponding to the rep continuous chance that is the specific effect is displayed, and the decorative pattern after the change has already stopped is stopped in the first reel display area R1 and the third reel display area R3. In the second reel display area R2, it is shown that the decorative symbols are variably displayed and are not stopped yet.

  FIG. 230 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of continuation determination of the continuation chance as a specific effect. On the display screens D1 and D2 here, a continuation determination effect for determining whether or not the continuation chance is continued is displayed. In the continuation effect, an effect is given that gives the player a feeling of ambition not knowing whether or not the continuation chance will continue.

  The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, and a third reel display area R3, as in FIG. 229 described above. Each display area is an area for variably displaying and stopping the decorative symbols on the reel by rotating and stopping the reel.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 230, the decorative symbols after the change has already been stopped are stopped and displayed in the first reel display area and the third reel display area R3, and among the stopped displayed decorative symbols, the replay symbols are displayed. It is shown that the replay symbol R21 and the button press instruction symbol R22 are displayed in the second reel display area R2.

[Rip-up chance transition process flow]
FIG. 231 shows a processing procedure of the rep consecutive chance transfer process performed by the peripheral control board 4010. The peripheral control board 4010 receives a change pattern command from the main control board 4100 when a game ball enters the start opening and the special control is changed by the main control board 4100, and follows the processing procedure shown in FIG. , Rep consecutive chance transfer processing is executed.

  First, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not a variation pattern command (HPC) from the main control board 4100 has been received (Rec) (SP51).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP51, the peripheral control board 4010 starts the change (Change) of the decorative symbol (DecoPat) corresponding to the special symbol (SP52).

  The peripheral control board 4010 stops the rotation of the reels in the order of the first reel and the third reel, and stops display on the first and third reels (No. 1 & No. 3 Real) when the rotation of the third reel is stopped. Is there a replay symbol (RP) in each of the decorated symbols, and whether the replay symbol on the first reel and the replay symbol on the third reel are stopped on the active line, and is a temper (TP)? Whether or not is determined (SP53).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 proceeds to step SP51 and determines again whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP53, it performs a precursor effect (SigDir) (SP54).

  In the peripheral control board 4010, when the rotation of the second reel is stopped, the replay symbol (RP) is stopped and displayed on the second reel (No. 2 Real), and the replay symbols on the first to third reels are displayed. It is determined whether or not the vehicle is stopped on the active line (SP55).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 proceeds to step SP51 and determines again whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP55, it rotates the first to third reels without carrying out the reservation and changes the decorative symbols on the first to third reels. Display (DecoPat = Change) is made (SP56).

  The peripheral control board 4010 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner without reservation, stops the rotation of the first to third reels, and displays the decorative symbols on the first to third reels. It is determined whether there is a replay symbol and the replay symbols on the first to third reels are stopped and displayed on the active line (RP = Flush) (SP57).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP59. On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it determines whether or not the variation of the decorative symbol that does not involve the reservation digest has reached the specified number of times (Comp) after shifting to the lip consecutive chance. (SP58).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 proceeds to step SP56 and repeats the variation of the decorative pattern not accompanied by the reservation digestion.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP58, it determines whether or not to perform a development effect (Dev) such as a reach effect (SP59).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it ends this process. On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it performs a development effect (DevDir) (SP60) and ends this process.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a specific symbol (in this case, a replay symbol) that is determined in advance in a decorative symbol in the effect of a lip consecutive chance to display a decorative symbol in a variable manner without holding digestion. Since the production is continued by aligning, the player can be aware of the stop pattern of the first reel, and the existence significance of the first reel can be established to improve the game performance.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the rep consecutive chance is a specific effect that is performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the stop pattern of the first reel in the normal gaming state even if it is not the high probability gaming state. Can be made conscious of the player, and the significance of the existence of the first reel can be established to improve the game performance.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, if the replay symbols are not prepared at the time of the rep series chance, the rep series chance is immediately ended, so that the player can be aware of the stop pattern of the first reel with a sense of tension. It is possible to improve the gameability by establishing the significance of existence of one reel.

[5-6. Lost confirmed design production]
In the peripheral board 4010, before the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives and displays the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100, based on the lottery result related to the effect, the group of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as described above. A characteristic reach production (super reach production) is executed.

  In this super reach production, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on the video data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and a group of decorative symbols (for example, left, First, the left and right decorative symbols as combinations of decorative symbols that can evoke a specific law out of the three decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped. Display (reach production start means). At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a also outputs sound from the speaker.

  Next, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a makes it difficult for the liquid crystal display device 1900 to recall a specific law between the left and right decorative symbols as a combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed among the group of decorative symbols described above, and The middle decorative symbols as the remaining decorative symbols of the group of decorative symbols described above are variably displayed according to a mode in which the player cannot easily recognize the left and right decorative symbols as the combination of decorative symbols used in the reach production ( Reach symbol concealment means).

  Next, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is a decorative symbol that cannot cause the liquid crystal display device 1900 to recall a specific law between the above-mentioned middle decorative symbol and the special symbol. A scorpion symbol (losing confirmation symbol) as a special purpose symbol for allowing the player to recognize that there is no change is displayed together with the remaining decorative symbols (losing symbol determination means).

  Next, when the special symbol lottery is won, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, together with the left and right decorative symbols as a combination of the decorative symbols described above, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 after the special symbol change time has elapsed. A group of decorative symbols is presented to the player in a manner in which the medium decorative symbols as the remaining decorative symbols are arranged, and it is suggested that the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, if the special design lottery is not won, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a displays the scorpion design as the special use design described above on the liquid crystal display device 1900 after the variation time of the special design has elapsed. The display is stopped in a more conspicuous manner than the symbol, and the scorpion symbol as the special use symbol is instructed to be a lost decision symbol meaning that the special symbol lottery is not won (lottery result indication means).

  Here, when the player touches a reach effect in which the remaining decorative symbols are variably displayed in a state where a combination of decorative symbols (for example, the left and right decorative symbols) that can recall a specific law is stopped and displayed, Since no specific law is evoked between the middle decorative symbol as the remaining decorative symbol and the left and right decorative symbols, which are combinations of the decorative symbols, reach production is executed for any type of decorative symbol. I can't recognize what they are. However, after the start of the reach production, the player gradually touches the scorpion symbol as a special-use symbol that appears every time he / she has not won the special symbol lottery. You will have the opportunity to learn experientially repeatedly that the symbol clearly shows that you have not won the special lottery. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide gameability that is easy for a player to understand even if a group of decorative symbols that are difficult to recognize specific laws are used.

[5-7. Cherry watermelon mode production]
[Various display screens in cherry watermelon mode]
FIG. 232 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when shifting to the cherry watermelon mode which is the specific mode. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, and a third reel display area R3.

  The first reel display area R1 is a display area in which the decorative symbols on the first reel are variably displayed and stopped by rotating and stopping the first reel. Here, it is shown that the cherry symbol R11 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the first reel.

  The second reel display area R2 is a display area in which the decorative symbols on the second reel are variably displayed and stopped by rotating and stopping the second reel. Here, since the second reel is still rotating, the decorative symbols on the second reel are displayed in a variable manner and cannot be recognized.

  The third reel display area R3 is a display area that displays the decorative symbols on the third reel in a variable manner and stopped display by rotating and stopping the third reel. Here, since the third reel is still rotating, the decorative symbols on the third reel are displayed in a variable manner and cannot be recognized.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 232, the cherry symbol R11 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the first reel, the other second and third reels are still rotating, and the cherry symbol R11 is in the middle stage of the first reel. It is shown that the condition for shifting to the cherry watermelon mode, which is the specific mode, is satisfied by being stopped. In this case, the cherry watermelon mode transition condition is that the cherry symbol R11, which is a specific symbol, is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the first reel. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cherry symbol R11 is placed in any stage of the first to third reels. Similarly, the cherry watermelon mode transition condition may be satisfied even when is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 233 shows another screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when shifting to the cherry watermelon mode which is the specific mode. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, and a third reel display area R3, as in FIG.

  The first reel display area R1 is a display area in which the decorative symbols on the first reel are variably displayed and stopped by rotating and stopping the first reel. Here, it is shown that the watermelon symbol R111 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the first reel.

  The second reel display area R2 is a display area in which the decorative symbols on the second reel are variably displayed and stopped by rotating and stopping the second reel. Here, it is shown that the watermelon symbol R211 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the second reel.

  The third reel display area R3 is a display area that displays the decorative symbols on the third reel in a variable manner and stopped display by rotating and stopping the third reel. Here, it is shown that the watermelon symbol R311 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the third reel.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 233, the watermelon symbol R111 is stopped and displayed at the middle stage of the first reel, the watermelon symbol R211 is stopped and displayed at the middle stage of the second reel, and the watermelon symbol R311 is stopped and displayed at the middle stage of the third reel. Since the watermelon symbols R111 to R311 are arranged in all the middle stages of the first to third reels on the effective line, it is indicated that the cherry watermelon mode transition condition which is the specific mode is established. Here, the cherry watermelon mode transition condition is that the watermelon symbols R111 to R311 which are specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle stage of each reel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Similarly, when the watermelon symbol R211 and the watermelon symbol R311 are arranged in the lower stage of the third reel, the cherry watermelon mode transition condition may be satisfied.

  FIG. 234 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 at the time of production in the cherry watermelon mode which is the specific mode. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a first reel display area R1, a second reel display area R2, a third reel display area R3, and a meter image M1.

  The first reel display area R1 is a display area in which the decorative symbols on the first reel are variably displayed and stopped by rotating and stopping the first reel.

  The second reel display area R2 is a display area in which the decorative symbols on the second reel are variably displayed and stopped by rotating and stopping the second reel. Here, it is shown that the cherry symbol R212 is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the second reel.

  The third reel display area R3 is a display area that displays the decorative symbols on the third reel in a variable manner and stopped display by rotating and stopping the third reel. Here, it is shown that the watermelon symbol 312 is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the third reel.

  When the cherry symbol R212 or the watermelon symbol R312 which is a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on any one of the first to third reels, the meter image M1 is previously stored in accordance with the number and type of the specific symbols which are stopped and displayed. It is a meter image displayed by adding predetermined points one by one. Here, the meter image M1 includes 13 meters. When this meter is full, an effect such as a level-up notice is performed. When the meter reaches a full level with the level reaching the highest level, for example, a continuous production in the cherry watermelon mode is performed.

[Flow of cherry watermelon mode transition processing]
FIG. 235 shows a processing procedure of cherry watermelon mode transition processing performed by the peripheral control board 4010. The peripheral control board 4010 receives a change pattern command from the main control board 4100 when a game ball enters the start port and the special control is changed by the main control board 4100, and follows the processing procedure shown in FIG. Then, the cherry watermelon mode transition process is executed.

  First, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern command (HPC) from the main control board 4100 has been received (Rec) (SP61).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP61, the peripheral control board 4010 starts the change (Change) of the decorative symbol (DecoPat) corresponding to the special symbol (SP62).

  The peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the cherry symbol (CH) has stopped on the first reel (No. 1 Real) that has stopped first among the first to third reels (SP63).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP65. On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the watermelon symbol (Sc) stops on the effective line when the rotation of all the reels of the first to third reels is stopped. It is determined whether or not a combination has been established (Flush) (SP64).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP61 and repeats the above-described processing when it receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 again.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP64, it shifts to the cherry watermelon mode (T-MODE) which is the specific mode (SP65).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 receives the change pattern command from the main control board 4100 in the cherry watermelon mode, the peripheral control board 4010 changes the decorative design corresponding to the special design and then decorates the first reel, the third reel, and the second reel in this order. The symbols are also stopped sequentially. At this time, the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the cherry symbol (CH) or the watermelon symbol (Sc), which is a specific symbol, has stopped on the first reel (No. 1 Real) (SP66).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP68. On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it performs point addition (PointAdd) on the meter image M1 (SP67).

  The peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the meter (Meter) of the meter image M1 is full (SP68).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it determines whether or not the current level (Level) is the highest level (Max) (SP69).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, ST increases the number of fluctuations (for example, 32 times) in the originally defined cherry watermelon mode by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 32 times) ST Addition effect (AddST) is performed (SP70).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP69, it performs an effect (Level UP) for improving the current level (SP71).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP68, it determines whether the cherry symbol (CH) or the watermelon symbol (Sc), which is a specific symbol, has stopped on the third reel (No. 3 Real). (SP72).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP74. In contrast, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it performs point addition (PointAdd) on the meter image M1 (SP73).

  The peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the meter (Meter) of the meter image M1 is full (SP74).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it determines whether or not the current level (Level) is the highest level (Max) (SP75).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, it performs an ST addition effect (AddST) that adds the number of fluctuations in the cherry watermelon mode that was initially specified by a predetermined number of fluctuations (SP76).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP75, it performs an effect (Level UP) for raising the current level (SP77).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP74, then it determines whether the cherry symbol (CH) or the watermelon symbol (Sc), which is a specific symbol, has stopped on the second reel (No. 2 Real). (SP78).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP80. In contrast, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it performs point addition (PointAdd) on the meter image M1 (SP79).

  The peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the meter (Meter) in the meter image M1 is full (SP80).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in this determination, it determines whether or not the current level (Level) is the highest level (Max) (SP81).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, it performs an ST addition effect (AddST) that adds the number of fluctuations in the cherry watermelon mode that was initially specified by a predetermined number of fluctuations (SP82).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP81, it performs an effect (Level UP) for improving the current level (SP83).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP80, whether or not the number of fluctuations in the ST, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations initially specified in the cherry watermelon mode, and the additional ST is digested (step S80). ST = Close) is determined (SP84).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it moves to step SP66 and again determines whether or not the cherry symbol or watermelon symbol which is the specific symbol is stopped on the first to third reels. repeat.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP84, it ends this process.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the production of the cherry watermelon mode in which the latent probability change is expected, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a specific symbol (cherry symbol or watermelon symbol) at each reel. However, in the case of a specific design, the points are counted for each reel, and this is cumulatively added to the meter, and the total points that are cumulatively added indicate the expectation of the latent probability change. For example, as a result of one change in the decorative symbols of all reels, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not the latent probability has changed at a relatively early stage as compared with the case where an effect of giving one point is given by the combination. . Thereby, the player can eliminate the anxiety and hesitation that occur in the ST period, and can enjoy the game in the ST period.

[5-8. Production in high probability gaming state]
In the main control board 4100, after the main control MPU 4100a finishes the big hit gaming state, a gaming state (with a predetermined probability (for example, 95%) with a special symbol lottery probability set relatively higher than the normal gaming state ( Transition to high probability game state. The main control MPU 4100a continues the high-probability gaming state during the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed for a specified number of times of variation (for example, 96 times) after shifting to the high-probability gaming state. On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the rendering operation according to the high probability gaming state based on the command received from the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as an effect in this high-probability gaming state, is based on the variation pattern command received every time a special symbol lottery is executed by the main control MPU 4100a, and the remaining number of fluctuations specified above is left. The following effect for displaying the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “first remaining number of times presentation effect”) is executed.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a shifts to such a high-probability gaming state with a limited number of times, first, the 7-segment display 2441 (remaining number of times presentation unit) shown in FIG. For example, “96 times” is displayed. Thereafter, each time the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the variation pattern commands from the main control board 4100 one after another, the peripheral segment MPU 4140a causes the 7-segment display 2441 to subtract the remaining number one by one in the order of “95”, “94”, “93”. Display the remaining number of times until “00”. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the above-described effects (hereinafter referred to as “the first remaining number of times presentation”) until the total number of special symbol variations reaches 96 after the transition to the high probability gaming state as described above. ("Direction").

  By the way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a wins the small win based on the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a when the special symbol lottery is executed for the tenth time after the transition to the high-probability gaming state after the big hit described above. If it turns out, the second remaining number of times presentation effect (another remaining number of times presentation effect) as an effect similar to the above-mentioned remaining number of times presentation effect executed after the big hit as described above is triggered by the time when the small hit is won. Execute.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a wins a small win in the special symbol lottery in the high-probability gaming state that has shifted after the big win, the first remaining number presentation effect executed after the big win is executed. The first remaining number presentation effect is concealed on the surface and the second remaining number presentation effect is executed. In addition, the second remaining number presentation effect is an effect as if it has shifted from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state, and even after the player has won a small hit. It gives the illusion of transitioning to a high probability gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in such a situation, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a has changed the number of special symbols from the time of winning the small hit for the 32nd time, for example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 will continue to have a high probability gaming state in the future. FIG. 167 shows instead of displaying “64 times”, which is the predetermined number of fluctuations of 96 to 32 times, as the remaining number of times on the 7-segment display 2441 at a specific time point when the word “not yet” is outputted. Thus, the remaining number of times “54 times” is presented. The remaining number of times “54 times” corresponds to the remaining number of times in the first remaining number presentation effect that was concealed at this time.

  That is, in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is kind to the player at the specific time point described above, instead of presenting the remaining number of times in the second remaining number of times presentation effect that is a fake. Also, the remaining number of times in the first remaining number presentation effect corresponding to the real high probability gaming state is configured to be presented.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the 7-segment display 2441 on the game board 4, and the 7-segment display 2441 shifts to the high-probability gaming state after winning the big hit. In this case, it corresponds to a remaining number presentation unit for presenting the remaining number of times of the prescribed variation every time a special symbol is drawn out after the transition to the high probability gaming state. As described above, in the peripheral board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the 7-segment display 2441 to show the remaining number of times each time the special symbol lottery is executed after the transition to the high probability gaming state ( The remaining number presentation control means).

  Further, in the peripheral board 4010, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a wins a small win in the special symbol lottery in the high probability gaming state, it appears as if it has shifted to the high probability gaming state (by the above remaining number presentation control means, ) Restricting the presentation of the remaining number of the specified number of fluctuations based on the time of winning the small hit (remaining number presentation restriction means). Further, in the peripheral board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not use the time at which the small hit is won as a reference, but the remaining number of specified fluctuations based on the time at which the game is shifted to the high probability gaming state after winning the big hit. The number of times is displayed on the 7-segment display 2441 (real remaining number of times presentation means).

  According to the pachinko machine 1 configured as described above, the player first determines the remaining number of times until the specified number of times as the number of changes in the special symbol in such a high probability gaming state gradually reaches the specified number of times. You can enjoy the game with a sense of joy and joy every time a special symbol lottery is executed. Furthermore, when the player had predicted that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the small hit reached “32”, the continuation would be “64”. As shown in FIG. In contact with the display of “54 times” in the device 2441, a trial and error is performed as to why the difference of 10 times occurs in the display. Then, the player remembers that he had won the big hit 10 times before the small hit, and that the remaining number of changes in the number of special symbols in the high probability gaming state is accurately presented based on the big hit. Recognize and have confidence in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state that has continuously shifted after the jackpot gaming state, the player does not touch the information that is originally distorted from the content, so there is an opportunity to reduce interest Extremely less.

[5-9. Docken look-ahead production part 1]
In the present embodiment, in the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a has received the start signal from the first start port sensor 3524 when the fired game ball is received by the first start port 2101 (“start winning prize”). ”), The special symbol lottery is executed and the starting condition is established. Thereafter, when the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 4100a displays start hold information indicating that the start of fluctuation of the special symbol is held for each start signal. Hold corresponding to.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, when the start condition is satisfied and the start condition as a condition for allowing the start of variation of the special symbol is satisfied, the result of the special lottery and the special symbol The special symbol variation pattern command including the variation time is output and the variation of the special symbol is started. After that, the main control MPU 4100a stops and displays the special symbol according to the result of the special symbol when the variation time of the special symbol elapses. On the other hand, if the lottery of the special symbol is won, the main control MPU 4100a Transition to an advantageous jackpot gaming state.

  Here, when viewed from the front, a right accessory unit 3300 including a movable decorative body 3302 is provided at the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The right accessory unit 3300 executes the rendering operation by driving the movable decorative body 3302 based on the rendering control signal received from the peripheral board 4010. The right accessory unit 3300 is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 while visually confirming the operating state of the movable decorative body 3302.

  In the peripheral board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a variably displays the decorative symbol group according to the change of the special symbol based on the special symbol change pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (variable display control means). The peripheral control MPU 4140a prefetches the lottery result of the special symbol after the start condition is later established in a state where at least one start hold information is held, and the decoration corresponding to the previous special symbol for which the start condition is satisfied A pre-reading effect (prior suggestion effect) for implicitly suggesting the lottery result of the subsequent special symbol is executed during the period in which the symbol group is variably displayed (prior suggestion effect control means).

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a part of the pre-reading effect, at least a variation of a plurality of decorative symbols that are continuously executed in response to the variation of the special symbol and the subsequent special symbol, By continuously executing a plurality of types of unit effects that can be visually recognized (three times of docking), a single special effect that straddles the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbol groups by visually executing the plurality of unit effects is visually recognized. Configure (unit effect control means). First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, based on the special symbol variation pattern command from the main control MPU 4100a, the variation that the start condition is satisfied after the start symbol is awarded after the special symbol that is currently varied, but the start condition is not satisfied. If the hold information is held, the content of the start hold information is prefetched with a predetermined probability, and the display content of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out. Special effects such as

  That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol as described above, as a unit effect of these unit effects, first, as shown in FIG. 236, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Immediately after driving the movable decorative body 3302 in the right accessory unit 3300 provided at the right corner of the right corner to pulsate left and right, a display control signal is output to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and the right corner of the display area is displayed. A small character string “Dokkun” is displayed (first unit production). At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to variably display the decorative symbol group corresponding to the variation of the special symbol in an inconspicuous manner at the upper left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol group corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays such a small “docking” character string after pulsation driving, and then stops the decorative symbol group in a state in which it is inconspicuous or difficult to visually recognize, for a predetermined period. There is a case where a standby state is set for a while and then the following effects are executed. Due to the presence of such a standby state for a predetermined period, the player continues to perform the following second unit effect in a state in which it is not apparent whether the subsequent effect will continue to be executed. And begging to be executed, and having fun while expecting for the predetermined period.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the movable decorative body 3302 provided at the right corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. 237 as one unit effect next to the plurality of unit effects described above. Immediately after being driven to pulsate to the left and right with a larger amplitude than the first unit effect, a display control signal is output to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and a slightly larger “docking” is placed slightly in the middle and right side of the display area. "Is displayed (second unit effect). At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a corresponds to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a in response to the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the next special symbol at the upper left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. After the next decorative symbol group is variably displayed in an inconspicuous manner, the decorative symbol group corresponding to the lottery result of the next special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a somewhat large “docking” character string after such pulsation driving, and then stops displaying the decorative symbol group in an inconspicuous or invisible manner for a predetermined period. It may be in a standby state over a period of time, and then the following effects may be executed. Due to the presence of such a standby state for a predetermined period, the player continues to perform the following third unit effect in a state in which it is not apparent whether the subsequent effect will continue to be executed. And begging to be executed, and having fun while expecting for the predetermined period.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the movable decorative body 3302 provided at the right corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. 238 as one unit effect next to the plurality of unit effects described above. Immediately after being driven to pulsate to the left and right with a larger amplitude than the second unit effect, a display control signal is output to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and the “dock” that is larger at the center and slightly to the left of the display area. Is displayed (third unit effect). At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a corresponds to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a in response to the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the next special symbol at the upper left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. Further, after the next decorative symbol group is variably displayed in an inconspicuous manner, the decorative symbol group corresponding to the lottery result of the next special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a somewhat large “docking” character string after such pulsation driving, and then stops displaying the decorative symbol group in an inconspicuous or invisible manner for a predetermined period. It may be in a standby state over a period of time, and then the following effects may be executed. Due to the presence of the standby state for a predetermined period of time, the player will continue to execute the following special effects in a state in which it is not apparent whether the subsequent effects will continue to be executed. And happily spending a certain period of time while expecting.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a drives the movable decorative body 3302 of the right accessory unit 3300 to jump out to the left side so as to cover the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. In that case, the plurality of unit effects shown in FIGS. 236 to 238 are continuous because they have a common character string (corresponding to the “docking” described above) with the same content but different sizes. It is composed visually as one special effect. At this time, the player pays attention to the plurality of unit effects shown in FIGS. 236 to 238 due to the relevance of the character string “docking”.

  If it does in this way, one special effect of the aspect which continued across the change display of the decoration symbol group of the multiple times in the look-ahead period of the lottery result of a special symbol will be comprised visually. That is, one special effect is formed across the prefetch period. First, by the appearance of the “docking” display (see FIG. 236) accompanying the pulse-like drive of the movable decorative body 3302 of the right hand accessory unit 3300, the player is not able to do anything in the subsequent lottery result of the special symbol that has been pre-read. Recognizing that there is a result to be expected, the game can be continued while looking forward to the disclosure of the lottery result. In addition, as a special effect, unlike the conventional case, it is possible to realize an effect that uses multiple variations of a special symbol. Therefore, multiple variations of a special symbol can be achieved compared to a conventional effect that uses a single variation of a special symbol. Since it is possible to configure a production that takes into account, more various productions can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of effects accompanying changes in a plurality of special symbols.

[5-10. Docken look-ahead production part 2]
In the peripheral board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the movable ornament body 3302 (attention effect device) of the right accessory unit 3300 to be displayed by the player each time a plurality of types of unit effects are executed as a part of the pre-read effect described above. As an aspect that can attract attention, for example, pulsation driving is performed (attention calling means). In addition, as a part of the pre-reading effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a makes at least the variation display of the decorative symbol group difficult to visually recognize when executing the special effect described above (display condition concealment unit).

  If it does in this way, a player will pay attention to the special effect which looks like the one effect mentioned above, and it will become easy to gather a gaze at the right end part of the display field of liquid crystal display 1900. At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a repeatedly performs the variable display of the decorative symbol group on the upper left end of the display area (or performs the variable display in a manner that is difficult or invisible to the player). ), The player is difficult to notice the change display.

  Therefore, the player indicates that the decorative symbol change display has progressed along with the special symbol change from the start (see FIG. 236) to the end (see FIG. 238) of the special effect. It is noticed for the first time after the special performance ends (see FIG. 239). In other words, for example, when there is a limit number of times (eg, 96 times) that a special symbol is allowed to change in a high-probability gaming state that has continuously shifted from the jackpot gaming state, You will notice that it has decreased. In this high-probability gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a makes it easy to accept the game ball to the second starting port 2102 with the operation of the blade 2125 (movable piece) of the ordinary electric accessory and a special symbol. You may make it be the game state (time-short game state) which shortened the fluctuation time.

  As described above, in response to the decrease in the number of times of limitation, the player recognizes that the special symbol has already fluctuated several times in the special effect that looked like a single effect, and is fooled by this special effect. It comes to realize what had been done. Therefore, the player feels frustrated in contact with the fact that the number of fluctuations in special symbols has decreased without knowing it, and recognizes the depth of this game. It becomes difficult.

[5-11. Depth display production]
[Decorative design and double LCD]
When the peripheral control board 4010 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 variably displays the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control board 4010 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 generates control data (display command) based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, the peripheral control board 4010 transmits the generated display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and uses the first display panel LCD1 and the second display panel LCD2 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150. As a result, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Hereinafter, the effect of the variable display of decorative symbols performed by the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described.

  First, the peripheral control board 4010 displays the decorative symbols to be displayed on the first display panel LCD1 on the near side as viewed from the player when the decorative symbols are variably displayed using the first display panel LCD1 and the second display panel LCD2. Using the shape, pattern, color, and the like as a reference, the reference decorative pattern is displayed on the first display panel LCD1. For example, the peripheral control board 4010 displays a cherry symbol on the first display panel LCD1.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 gradually changes the shape, pattern, color, and the like of the reference decorative pattern displayed on the first display panel LCD1. For example, the peripheral control board 4010 changes the shape and pattern of the cherry pattern so as to be gradually reduced and the color to be gradually reduced.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 changes the reference decorative pattern displayed on the first display panel LCD1 as described above within a predetermined range, and then changes from the first display panel LCD1 to the second display panel LCD1. The display of the decorative design is switched to the display panel LCD2. At this time, the peripheral control board 4010 displays the shape, pattern, and color of the decorative symbols displayed on the first display panel LCD1 before switching, and the switching after switching so that the decorative symbols are displayed smoothly before and after the switching. The shape, pattern and color of the decorative design displayed on the second display panel LCD2 are changed to be substantially the same.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 displays the decorative symbols displayed on the second display panel LCD2 after the switching by gradually changing them in the same manner as described above, and finally ends the display after reducing it to the limit.

  In the above-described variation display mode of the decorative symbols, first, the decorative symbols are displayed on the first display panel LCD1, and then the display of the decorative symbols is switched from the first display panel LCD1 to the second display panel LCD2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, the decorative design may be displayed on the second display panel LCD2, and then the display of the decorative design may be switched from the second display panel LCD2 to the first display panel LCD1.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, they are physically and from the front side to the back side as viewed from the player, or from the back side to the front side. The decorative design can be visually displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the decorative symbols can be displayed in a variable manner while representing an intermediate world that connects the external world that the player recognizes visually or auditorily and the internal world inherent to the gaming machine. . As a result, the player can enjoy an effect with a sense of depth expressed by a so-called dual liquid crystal without any special effects (for example, a normal reach effect or the like). The player can easily enter the world view unique to the gaming machine and enjoy the world view.

  It should be noted that the above-described variation display of decorative symbols may be performed constantly, or may be performed suddenly or periodically for a predetermined number of variations. If the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display is not always performed, but it is performed suddenly or periodically, it is possible to make a sense of depth stand out. Moreover, by performing it suddenly or regularly, a player's interest can be changed and it can prevent a player from getting bored.

[Screen cracking production and double LCD]
FIG. 240 shows a screen configuration diagram of the display screens D1 and D2 when the screen break effect is performed. The display screens D1 and D2 are composed of a plurality of decorative symbols SZ1 and a plurality of pieces H1.

  The decorative symbol SZ1 is variably displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side as viewed from the player, and then stopped and displayed. In addition, any one of the plurality of decorative symbols SZ1 (here, “7” symbol in the second reel) is displayed on the front side from the back display screen D2 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed so as to move physically and visually toward the display screen D1, and finally displayed on the front display screen D1.

  Originally, the fragment H1 is displayed as a single glass image that is visually positioned on the near side of the player from the display surface of the plurality of decorative symbols SZ1 (before the decorative symbol SZ11 is moved and displayed). Specifically, the fragment H1 is displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side, and is visually displayed as if it is in front of the plurality of decorative symbols SZ1 (including the decorative symbol SZ11).

  After that, the broken piece H1 is originally displayed as one glass image as described above, and the glass surface of the glass image is cracked and the glass surface is cracked along with the movement display of the decorative pattern SZ11. Displayed as a broken piece of glass when splashed.

  When the broken piece H1 is displayed as a broken piece when the glass surface is broken and scattered, the broken piece H1 is displayed so as to move physically and visually from the rear display screen D2 toward the front display screen D1. The debris H1 is finally or temporarily displayed on the front display screen D1. Note that the fragment H1 finally displayed on the display screen D1 on the near side does not disappear immediately (it is not displayed), but only for a predetermined period in order to have a reverberation of depth. It may be displayed continuously.

  In this manner, the fragment H1 functions as a history image indicating that the decorative design SZ11 has physically and visually moved from the back side toward the front side.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 240, the plurality of decorative symbols SZ1 stopped and displayed on the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 are displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side, and the decorative symbols SZ11 on the second reel R2 are It is shown that a fragment H1 that is moved and displayed from the back side toward the near side and that the decorative symbol SZ11 has moved is displayed as a history image on the display screen D1 on the near side.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, among the plurality of display screens D1 and D2, the decorative design SZ1 is displayed on the display screen D2 arranged on the back side as viewed from the player, while the decorative design SZ1. The virtual glass image is displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side as viewed from the player so as to be positioned visually in front of the fluctuation display surface, and then a predetermined screen cracking effect is displayed. Based on the start timing, the decorative design SZ11 is physically and visually moved from the rear display screen D2 toward the front display screen D1 and displayed, and the decorative design SZ11 is moved with the movement of the decorative design SZ11. Breaks through the virtual glass surface, and the broken glass H1 is broken and scattered so as to move physically and visually from the rear display screen D2 to the front display screen D1. It can be.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce an effect that exceeds the range of expression that can be expressed by a single display screen. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a strong impression that the decorative design SZ11 and the fragment H1 are actually directed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sufficient sense of realism and to empathize the player with the game world.

  In general, in order to produce a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth on a single display screen, more image information is required than to produce an effect of simply displaying a two-dimensional image on a plane. Therefore, in general, when a stereoscopic effect or a depth sensation is produced, there is a problem in that control relating to image processing becomes complicated and the load on the CPU or the like increases. However, according to the present embodiment, since a stereoscopic effect and a sense of depth are produced by a plurality of display screens, the image information displayed on each display screen is the same as the image information displayed on a single display screen. In addition, control relating to image processing performed on each display screen can be simplified.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the fragments H1 can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period on the display screen D1 on the near side (the visibility can be maintained even if the fragments H1 are displayed). Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform a further development effect such that the fragment H1 returns to its original state. Since the player can be made aware of the possibility of further development effects in this way, it is possible to produce a thrilling feeling and expectation that the fragments H1 may return. Note that if only a single display screen is used and a broken piece H1 is displayed and an attempt is made to restore it, the display screen after the screen crack that the player originally wants to pay attention to (for example, There is a problem that it is difficult to see the decorative pattern SZ1 and the background image. However, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a feeling of pounding and a sense of expectation as described above while solving such a visibility problem.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the fragments H1 can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period on the display screen D1 on the near side, so that the player can enjoy the rendition of past effects. . In the case of gaming machines that produce effects one after another, there is a problem that the player cannot usually keep up with the speed of the effects and cannot enjoy the reverberation of each effect. However, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the player can enjoy the reverberation of the past performance.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the debris H1 can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period on the front display screen D1, so that the player is displayed on the back display screen D2. It is possible to simultaneously recognize the current effect and the past effect (debris H1 and the like) displayed on the front display screen D1. Then, the player can estimate the expectation level of the current effect based on the contents of the effect performed in the past (for example, the larger the size of the fragment H1, the higher the expectation level of the current effect). Can be performed).

  In the above-described screen splitting effect shown in FIG. 240, the decorative design SZ11 is moved from the back display screen D2 toward the front display screen D1, and the debris H1 is displayed on the front side as the decorative design SZ11 is moved. Although it is an effect of displaying on the screen D1, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an effect as described below may be used to expand the game space in the depth direction.

  That is, as another screen cracking effect, a plurality of decorative symbols SZ1 are included in a virtual glass case image and displayed on the front display screen D1. Then, any one of the included decorative symbols SZ1 (decorative symbol SZ11) is moved from the display screen D1 on the front side toward the display screen D2 on the back side, and the decorative symbol SZ11 is moved. The glass case image is broken, and the broken piece H1 may be displayed on the display screen D1 on the near side.

  In this case, a new game space is formed in the depth direction as viewed from the player, and the new game space is suddenly made a surface layer. The game space that is suddenly made a new surface and the existing display screen (display screen D1 on the near side) The game space can be expanded in the depth direction by connecting to the game space formed by (1). Thereby, the depth effect can be performed beyond the range of expression that can be expressed that is limited only by the game space formed by the existing display screen D1.

[Simultaneous fluctuation and double liquid crystal]
FIG. 241 shows a screen configuration diagram of the simultaneous variation display screen of decorative symbols. The gaming machine 1 is configured by arranging the first display screen D1 on the near side when viewed from the player, and is configured by arranging the second display screen D2 on the back side when viewed from the player.

  The first display screen D1 is a display screen that is selected by the peripheral control unit 4140 when a game ball has entered the start port of either the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. It is a display screen for variably displaying the first decorative design SZ1.

  The second display screen D2 is a display screen selected by the peripheral control unit 4140 when a game ball enters one of the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. It is a display screen for variably displaying the second decorative design SZ2.

  Accordingly, in the case of FIG. 241, the first display screen D1 is selected by the peripheral control unit 4140, for example, when a game ball enters the first start port 2101, and the first display screen D1 is displayed on the first display screen D1. It is shown that the decorative design SZ1 is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second display screen D2 is selected by the peripheral control unit 4140 when the game ball enters the second start port 2102, and the second decorative design SZ2 fluctuates on the second display screen D2. It is shown that it is displayed. That is, in the case of FIG. 241, it is shown that the first decorative design SZ1 and the second decorative design SZ2 are variably displayed at the same time.

  In addition, among the first decorative symbols SZ1 displayed on the first display screen D1, the “red 7” symbol is stopped and displayed on the first reel R1 and the third reel R3, and is still displayed on the second reel R2. Since the stop symbol is variably displayed without being fixed, it is indicated that the first decorative symbol SZ1 displayed on the first display screen D1 is in a so-called reach state. In order to emphasize that the first decorative symbol SZ1 is in the reach state, the first decorative symbol SZ1 in the reach state is displayed on the first display screen D1 on the near side, while the reach state is reached. It is shown that the second decorative symbol SZ2 that is not is displayed with the brightness lowered on the second display screen D2 on the back side.

  FIG. 242 shows the processing procedure of the simultaneous variation display process. When the peripheral control unit 4140 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 when a game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, the peripheral control unit 4140 follows the processing procedure shown in FIG. The simultaneous variation display process is executed. Note that the peripheral control unit 4140 is independent of (in parallel with) this figure when a game ball enters the first start port 2101 and when a game ball enters the second start port 2102. The process shown in 242 is executed.

  First, the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100 (HPC = REC?) (SP91).

  If the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in this determination, it will wait until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP91, it selects either the first display screen D1 or the second display screen D2 (Choise = No. 1 Dispor). No. 2 Disp) (SP92).

  The peripheral control unit 4140 may adopt a method of selecting a display screen by lottery as a method of selecting a display screen in step SP92. Further, the peripheral control unit 4140 is a case where, for example, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the first display screen D1 when the game ball has already entered the first start port 2101, and immediately after the first In the case of selecting a display screen for variably displaying the decorative symbol in response to the game ball entering the second starting port 2102, the second display screen D2 that has not yet been variably displayed is displayed as the display screen for variably displaying. You may choose.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the display screen selected in step SP92 is the first display screen D1 (Choise = No.1Disp?) (SP93).

  If the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in this determination, the peripheral control unit 4140 displays the decorative design in a variable manner on the first display screen D1 (SZ = No. 1 Disp) (SP94).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP93, the peripheral control unit 4140 displays the decorative design in a variable manner on the second display screen D2 (SZ = No.2Disp) (SP95).

  The peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not to perform the expectation effect while the decorative design is variably displayed on the display screen of either the first display screen D1 or the second display screen D2. KE?) (SP96).

  The expectation effect here refers to an effect indicating the expectation degree of winning in the jackpot lottery, and is when the game ball enters either the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. However, this is an effect in which common contents (common characters) are displayed. In addition, this expectation degree effect is an effect in which the degree of expectation shown is different depending on the type of the start opening into which the game ball has entered (the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102).

  Specifically, the degree of expectation effect is the content of the effect regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the game ball enters the second start port 2102. (Display character) is common. On the other hand, the degree of expectation shown by this expectation degree effect is higher when, for example, a game ball enters the first start port 2101 than when a game ball enters the second start port 2102.

  If the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control unit 4140 ends the simultaneous variation display process. That is, the peripheral control unit 4140 normally displays the decorative symbols in a variably displayed state, stops the decorative symbols, and ends the decorative symbol variability display processing.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP96, whether the decorative design is currently variably displayed on the display screens of both the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2. (SZ = No. 1 & No. 2 Disp?) (SP97).

  If the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in this determination, the peripheral control unit 4140 starts from the intermediate layer between the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2, and is based on a predetermined synchronization point in the one-variable display. And display the expectation effect (KE = StartDisp = Between No.1Disp & No.2Disp), and then display the expectation effect from the intermediate layer in either the first display screen D1 or the second display screen D2. The display is moved and displayed on the screen (SP98), and the simultaneous variation display process is terminated.

  Thus, when performing the expectation effect, first, the expectation effect (common character) is displayed starting from the middle layer, so that the expectation indicated by the expectation effect is not immediately perceived by the player from the beginning of the effect. Can be. Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the disappointment of the player when a character with low expectation appears or when a character with low expectation continues to appear.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP97, it displays an expectation degree effect on the first display screen D1 (KE = Disp = No.1 Disp or No.2Disp) (SP99). ), The simultaneous variation display process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to display the decorative symbols on both the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2 at the same time. The number of variable displays per unit time can be increased without shortening to.

  Moreover, when both the display screens of the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2 are viewed from the front, the decorative symbols variably displayed on the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2 are confused. Therefore, when performing the expectation effect, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced since the expectation is known from the beginning of the effect.

  FIG. 243 shows another processing procedure of the simultaneous variation display processing. When the peripheral control unit 4140 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 when a game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, the peripheral control unit 4140 follows the processing procedure shown in FIG. 243. The simultaneous variation display process is executed. Note that the peripheral control unit 4140 is independent of (in parallel with) this figure when a game ball enters the first start port 2101 and when a game ball enters the second start port 2102. The process shown in 243 is executed.

  First, the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100 (HPC = REC?) (SP101).

  If the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in this determination, it will wait until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  In contrast, when the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP101, the peripheral control unit 4140 selects either the first display screen D1 or the second display screen D2 (Choise = No. 1 Dispor). No. 2 Disp) (SP102).

  The peripheral control unit 4140 may adopt a method of selecting a display screen by lottery as a method of selecting a display screen in step SP102. Further, the peripheral control unit 4140 is a case where, for example, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the first display screen D1 when the game ball has already entered the first start port 2101, and immediately after the first In the case of selecting a display screen for variably displaying the decorative symbol in response to the game ball entering the second starting port 2102, the second display screen D2 that has not yet been variably displayed is displayed as the display screen for variably displaying. You may choose.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the display screen selected in step SP92 is the first display screen D1 (Choise = No.1Disp?) (SP103).

  If the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in this determination, the peripheral control unit 4140 variably displays the decorative symbols on the first display screen D1 (SZ = No.1Disp) (SP104).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP93, the peripheral control unit 4140 displays the decorative design in a variable manner on the second display screen D2 (SZ = No.2Disp) (SP105).

  The peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the decorative symbol variably displayed on the display screen of the first display screen D1 or the second display screen D2 is in a reach state (RC?) ( SP106).

  If the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control unit 4140 ends the simultaneous variation display process. That is, the peripheral control unit 4140 normally displays the decorative symbols in a variably displayed state, stops the decorative symbols, and ends the decorative symbol variability display processing.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP96, whether the decorative design is currently variably displayed on the display screens of both the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2. (SZ = No.1 & No.2 Disp?) (SP107).

  When the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a positive result in this determination, the peripheral control unit 4140 displays a variation display of the reach state on the first display screen D1, and displays a variation display not in the reach state on the second display screen D2. (RCHH = No. 1 Disp & OHH = No. 2 Disp) (SP108), the simultaneous variation display process is terminated.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 displays the reach state variation display from the beginning on the first display screen D1, and the non-reach state variation display from the beginning on the second display screen D2. As a result, the display may not be switched.

  In addition, the peripheral control unit 4140 displays only the reach state change display when the reach state change display and the non-reach state change display are simultaneously displayed on the second display screen D2, for example. The display may be switched so as to be displayed on the display screen D1.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control unit 4140 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP107, the peripheral control unit 4140 switches the display so that the fluctuation display of the reach state is displayed on the first display screen D1 (RCHH = No.1Disp) ( SP109), the simultaneous variation display process is terminated.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 may not switch the display as a result when the reach state change display is displayed on the first display screen D1 from the beginning.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to display the decorative symbols on both the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2 at the same time. The number of variable displays per unit time can be increased without shortening to.

  In addition, for example, when the decorative design is variably displayed on the display screens of both the first display screen D1 and the second display screen D2, the decorative design variably displayed on the second display screen D2 is reached. In such a case, since the decorative design that is variably displayed on the first display screen D1 and the decorative design that is variably displayed on the second display screen D2 can be switched and displayed, In the simultaneous variation display, it is possible to emphasize the variation display that the player wants to pay more attention to.

[Big hit game and double LCD]
FIG. 244 shows a perspective view of the display screens D1 and D2 in the jackpot game. The display screens D1 and D2 are disposed to face each other, the display screen D1 is disposed on the near side when viewed from the player, and the display screen D2 is disposed on the far side when viewed from the player. That is, the display screens D1 and D2 are so-called double liquid crystal screens.

  A still image or a moving image is displayed on the player's central visual field V1 on the display screen D2, and a still image or a moving image is displayed on the player's peripheral visual field V2 on the display screen D1. More specifically, the still image or moving image displayed on the display screen D2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen D2, and the still image or moving image displayed on the display screen D1 excludes the central area of the display screen D1. Displayed at the four corners and sides.

  Here, the central visual field V1 is a region of about 20 degrees from the fovea which is a part of the eye, and the peripheral visual field V2 is a region other than that. The human eye can achieve the highest visual acuity and obtain high-definition visual perception in the central visual field V1 that is a constant region centered on the fovea, while the peripheral visual field V2 that is a region other than the central visual field V1. Has a structure in which color vision is lost due to decreased visual acuity.

  The gaming machine, for example, displays various effects (for example, a character effect with movement) that can improve game playability, and effects results (for example, a numerical value of a meter) as additional information obtained by the effect display. Is provided to the player, it is desirable to display the effect display so as to be included in the central visual field V1, and display the effect result so as to be included in the peripheral visual field V2.

  Accordingly, in the case of FIG. 244, various effect displays rich in game play are displayed in the central visual field V1, and the various effect displays are displayed on the display screen D2 on the back side as viewed from the player. On the other hand, in the peripheral visual field V2, effect results obtained by various effect displays displayed in the central visual field V1 are displayed, and the effect results are displayed on the display screen D1 on the near side as viewed from the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, various effect displays rich in game play and the effect results obtained as a result of the various effect displays are not displayed simultaneously on a single display screen, but are displayed as effects. Is displayed on the back display screen D2 so as to be included in the central visual field V1, and the production result is displayed on the display screen D1 on the near side so as to be included in the peripheral visual field V2. Can be provided appropriately. Thereby, since the player can obtain more information from the limited game board surface, the fall of interest is suppressed and the game can be enjoyed more.

[Functions and double liquid crystal part 1]
FIG. 245 shows the processing procedure of the effect effect amplification processing. When the peripheral control board 4010 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 executes the effect effect amplification process shown in FIG. 245 based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

  Here, the details of the processing until the peripheral control board 4010 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 are as follows.

  That is, when the handle device 500 is rotated by the player, the main relay terminal board 880 outputs a detection signal detected by the rotation operation of the player to the launch control unit 4120. When the detection signal is input, the launch control unit 4120 controls the launch solenoid 654 to rotate so as to launch a plurality of game balls into the game area per unit time.

  Any one of the plurality of game balls launched into the game area flows down while rolling by a plurality of obstacle nails provided in advance in the game area, and the first start port 2101 or the second It is received in the two start ports 2102. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, the first start port sensor 3524 or the second start port sensor 2166 detects that the game ball has been received, and this detection signal is used as the main signal. Output to the control board 4100.

  When the main control board 4100 receives a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3524 or the second start port sensor 2166, the main control board 4100 acquires any one random number from a plurality of random numbers stored in advance in the ROM 4100d and the like. An internal lottery is performed to determine whether the random number matches one random number stored in advance in the ROM 4100d or the like. The main control board 4100 converts the result of the internal lottery into a fluctuation pattern command, and outputs the converted fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 4010.

  In the effect effect amplification process according to the present embodiment, first, peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from main control board 4100 (HPC = REC?) (SP101).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it will wait until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP101, whether or not to perform a specific effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movable decorative body 3302 based on the received variation pattern command. (TE = Using Obj & Disp?) (SP102).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it performs another effect (for example, an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the movable decorative body 3302 alone), and then the variation pattern from the main control board 4100. Wait until a command is received.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP103, it determines whether to perform an effect of moving the movable decorative body 3302 by linking with the video of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (Disp Link). to Obj?) (SP103).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it performs another effect (for example, an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the movable decorative body 3302 alone), and then the variation pattern from the main control board 4100. Wait until a command is received.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP103, an image suggesting that the movable decorative body 3302 is movable is referred to as a back panel (hereinafter referred to as a second panel LCD2) in the liquid crystal display device 1900. ) (No. 2 Disp = Obj) (SP104).

  For the video suggesting the movement of the movable decorative body 3302, for example, the movable decorative body 3302 performs an operation such that it jumps out from the front panel (hereinafter referred to as the first panel LCD1) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by a predetermined distance. In some cases, there is a stereoscopic image in which a stereoscopic image imitating the movable decorative body 3302 transitions in stages from the second panel LCD 2 to the first panel LCD 1. More specifically, for example, when the movable decorative body 3302 is an accessory imitating a hammer, and the accessory imitating the hammer is movable so as to strike the first panel LCD 1, the three-dimensional imitation of the hammer. There is a stereoscopic image in which a simple image gradually changes from the second panel LCD 2 to the first panel LCD 1 and approaches the player.

  In addition, the other video suggesting the moving includes, for example, an image in which the image of the initiating agent for the movable decorative body 3302 to jump out transitions from the second panel LCD 2 to the first panel LCD 1 in a stepwise manner. More specifically, for example, when the movable decorative body 3302 is a role imitating dynamite, the image of the conductor is connected from the second panel LCD2 to the first panel LCD1, and the fire attached to the conductor is the second panel. There is an image approaching from the LCD 2 toward the first panel LCD 1.

  Here, the process in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image on the second panel LCD 2 is as follows.

  That is, the peripheral control unit 4140 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100, and instructs the effect of moving the movable decorative body 3302 by linking the received variation pattern command to the image of the liquid crystal display device 1900. If it is, the control signal is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  When the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140 is input, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 generates images for the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 under the control of the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts sprite data necessary for presentation here from the sprite data stored in advance in the character ROM 4150d, and temporarily stores the extracted sprite data in the character RAM 4150e. Next, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs the sprite data temporarily stored in the character RAM 4150e to the VDP 4150c. The VDP 4150c generates image data for two panels of the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 based on the input sprite data, and outputs the generated image data for the two panels to the image division module 4150f. To do.

  The image division module 4150f sorts the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 based on the input image data for the two sheets, and outputs the image data for the first panel LCD1. The image data is output to the first transmitter LVDS4150h, and the image data for the second panel LCD2 is output to the second transmitter LVDS4150i.

  The second transmitter LVDS 4150i converts the input image data into the LVDS format, and outputs the converted image data to the second panel LCD 2 via the scaler 4150k which is a resolution adjustment device. The second panel LCD 2 displays the input image data as image data for one line in the main scanning direction. The second panel LCD 2 displays the image data for one line in the main scanning direction, then shifts the display line in the sub-scanning direction, and again in the main scanning direction after the transition, a new line for one line. Repeat the process of displaying image data.

  Through the above processing, the second panel LCD 2 can display an image necessary for the effect here based on the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 displays an image suggesting the movement of the movable decorative body 3302 displayed on the second panel LCD 2 in a stepwise manner from the second panel LCD 2 to the first panel LCD 1 (From No. 2 Disp). to No. 1 Disp = Obj) (SP105).

  The process of displaying an image on the first panel LCD 1 by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is as described above. That is, when the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140 is input, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 generates images for the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 by the VDP 4150c, and for the first panel LCD by the image division module 4150f. The image data and the image data for the second panel LCD are sorted and output to the first transmitter LVDS 4150h, and the image data input by the first transmitter LVDS 4150h is converted to the LVDS format and converted. The obtained image data is output to the first panel LCD1. The first panel LCD 1 displays the input image data as image data for one line in the main scanning direction. In addition, the first panel LCD 1 displays the image data for one line in the main scanning direction, then shifts the display line in the sub scanning direction, and again in the main scanning direction after the transition, the new one line worth. Repeat the process of displaying image data.

  Note that the peripheral control unit 4140 displays a stereoscopic image that suggests the movement of the movable decorative body 3302 displayed on the second panel LCD 2 in a stepwise transition from the second panel LCD 2 to the first panel LCD 1, for example. The display ratio of the stereoscopic image displayed on the two-panel LCD 2 is gradually reduced from 100% to 90%, 80%,... 10%, while the stereoscopic image displayed on the first panel LCD 1 is displayed. Increase the ratio step by step from 0% to 10%, 20%, ... 100%. In this way, by sharing the display ratio of the stereoscopic video between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, a stereoscopic and realistic image can be displayed. Further, for example, 40% of the stereoscopic video is displayed on the first panel LCD1, 40% of the stereoscopic video is displayed on the second panel LCD2, and the remaining 20% is not displayed. A pseudo intermediate layer panel can be formed between the second panel LCD 2 and the second panel LCD 2. By forming this intermediate layer panel, a more stereoscopic and realistic image can be expressed.

  Through the above processing, the first panel LCD 1 and the second panel LCD 2 can display a stereoscopic and realistic image necessary for the production here based on the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 moves the movable decorative body 3302 in accordance with the image displayed on the first panel LCD 1 (Move Obj) (SP106).

  That is, the movable decoration body 3302 in the real world is powered by the movable decoration body 3302 in the stereoscopic and realistic video world formed by the first panel LCD1, the intermediate layer panel, and the second panel LCD2. It can be moved by.

  In this manner, the devices (including the movable decorative body 3302) are operated in the order of the back panel (second panel LCD2), the intermediate layer panel, the front panel (first panel LCD1), and the movable decorative body 3302 in this order. Thus, even if the movable range of the movable decorative body 3302 is actually movable only a predetermined distance from the front panel (first panel LCD1), it appears to move from the back panel (second panel LCD2). Can do. Therefore, the movable range of the movable decorative body 3302 can be expanded in a pseudo manner.

  The peripheral control board 4010 moves the movable decorative body 3302 and then moves the movable decorative body 3302 so that the front panel (first panel LCD 1), the back panel ( Images are displayed in the order of the second panel LCD 2). The image displayed here includes, for example, an image suggesting the influence of the movable decorative body 3302 being moved. More specifically, for example, when the movable decorative body 3302 is an accessory imitating a hammer, the peripheral control board 4010 displays an image of a broken screen on the first panel LCD 1 as the hammer hits the first panel LCD 1. Then, an image with a broken screen is also displayed on the second panel LCD2.

  As described above, by displaying the video suggesting the influence of the movable decorative body 3302 from moving from the first panel LCD 1 to the second panel LCD 2, the movable decorative body 3302 can exert an effect on the video. The effect can be amplified.

  As described above, the peripheral control board 4010 controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movable decorative body 3302 so that the image expands the movable range of the movable decorative body 3302 in a pseudo manner. After controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movable decorative body 3302 so as to amplify the effect that can be exerted on the image of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect effect amplification process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 4010 moves the movable decorative body 3302 by linking to the video on the display screen, the second panel displays an image suggesting that the movable decorative body 3302 is movable. An image indicating the movement of the movable decorative body 3302 displayed on the LCD 2 and then displayed on the second panel LCD 2 is displayed on the first panel LCD 1, and finally the movable decorative body 3302 displayed on the first panel LCD 1 is moved. By actually moving the movable decorative body 3302 in accordance with the suggested video, it is possible to produce an effect that the movable range of the movable decorative body 3302 is expanded in a pseudo manner. After that, the peripheral control board 4010 displays an image suggesting the influence of the movement of the movable decoration body 3302 on the first panel LCD1 in accordance with the movement of the movable decoration body 3302, and then the movable display displayed on the first panel LCD1. By displaying on the second panel LCD 2 an image that suggests the influence of the movement of the decorative body 3302, the effect that the movable decorative body 3302 can exert on the video can be amplified. Therefore, in a narrow production space, even if the movable range of the movable decorative body 3302 is limited, a dynamic production can be performed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Functions and double liquid crystal part 2]
FIG. 246 shows a conceptual diagram of a gaze image (also referred to as a field-of-view aggregated image that aggregates the player's field-of-view angle and field-of-view range) that gazes at the player. The gaze image is an image displayed on the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 when the profit disparity correction process (see FIG. 247) in the present embodiment is performed. As shown in FIG. 246, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a first panel LCD1 and a second panel LCD2.

  The first panel LCD 1 is disposed on the near side as viewed from the player. Further, the second panel LCD 2 is disposed on the back side as viewed from the player. The intermediate panel M1 is a pseudo image display surface formed between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 when the profit disparity correction process in the present embodiment is performed.

  Here, the intermediate layer panel M1 is illustrated as being formed between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of intermediate layer panels M1 may be formed between the second panel LCD2. Alternatively, pseudo panels may be formed between a plurality of actual panels.

  The viewing angle V1 is a normal viewing angle of the player before the gaze image in the present embodiment is displayed on the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2. The visual field range R1 is a player's visual field range in the first panel LCD1. Before the gaze image is displayed on the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, decorative designs and various effect images are displayed only on the first panel LCD1, and in this case, the player's viewing angle V1 and viewing range R1. Has been shown to be relatively large.

  The field-of-view range V2 is a player's field-of-view angle immediately after the gaze image in the present embodiment is displayed on the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2. In this case, a watch image is displayed on the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, and an intermediate layer panel M1 is formed. The intermediate layer panel M1 gradually moves the player's viewpoint in the back direction. The visual field range R2 is a player's visual field range in the intermediate layer panel M1. When the gaze image is displayed on the first panel LCD1, the intermediate layer panel M1, and the second panel LCD2, the player's viewing angle V2 and viewing range R2 are the viewing angle V1 and viewing range R1 before the viewing image is displayed. It is shown to be narrower than.

  The field-of-view range V3 is the player's field-of-view angle after a certain period of time has passed immediately after the gaze image in the present embodiment is displayed on the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2. In this case, the watch image is displayed on the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, and as described above, the intermediate layer panel M1 is formed, and the player's viewpoint moves further in the back direction by the intermediate layer panel M1. To do. The visual field range R3 is a player's visual field range in the second panel LCD2. When the gaze image is displayed on the first panel LCD1, the intermediate layer panel M1, and the second panel LCD2, and the fixed time has elapsed, the player's viewing angle V3 and the viewing range R3 are displayed. It is shown that the viewing angle V2 and the viewing range R2 immediately after that are further narrowed.

  In this way, the intermediate panel M1 is formed by using the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, and the player's viewing angles V1 to V3 in the order of the first panel LCD1, the intermediate panel M1, and the second panel LCD2. In addition, by performing an effect of displaying an image that gradually narrows the visual field range R1 to R3, it is possible to consolidate the player's viewpoints in one place and to stare (gaze) one place. .

  Further, by displaying the character image or character image in the visual field range R3, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the character image or character image. Thus, by displaying a character image, a character image, etc. in the visual field range R3, it is possible to concentrate the player's viewpoints in one place and to stare (gaze) one place. In particular, by displaying an image imitating the movable decorative body 3302 (an image smaller than the actual movable decorative body 3302) in the visual field range R3, the actual movable decorative body 3302 is moved in front of the player as will be described later. The surprise of the player at the time can be made larger.

  Further, in accordance with the watched video, the player that has been gathered in one place on the back panel is operated by operating the accessory arranged on the near side as viewed from the player than the first panel LCD1. Can be moved to the position of the accessory closest to the player. In this way, by instantaneously moving the player's viewpoint from a farther position to the nearest position, the player can experience unexpected events in a short time without any prior notice. It is possible to perform an effect that surprises the person and strikes the intention.

  In addition, by moving the player's viewpoint instantaneously from a distant position to a nearby position and performing an effect that surprises the player, for example, when winning a latent probability change that is not announced even if the probability change is won In general, in order to shift the gaming state from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state, a big hit game (movable piece of the special electric accessory opens and closes) that is hard to be detected by the player is fully understood. It can be overlooked that the movable piece of the special electric accessory is opened or closed, even if the player is a player who is still understanding or a player whose degree of understanding is insufficient. In this case, both a player with a sufficient level of understanding and a player with a low level of understanding can correct the profit gap obtained from the gaming machine 1 as little as possible.

  FIG. 247 shows a processing procedure of profit inequality correction processing. When the peripheral control board 4010 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 executes the profit disparity correction process shown in FIG. 247 based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

  Here, the details of the processing until the peripheral control board 4010 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 are as follows.

  That is, when the handle device 500 is rotated by the player, the main relay terminal board 880 outputs a detection signal detected by the rotation operation of the player to the launch control unit 4120. When the detection signal is input, the launch control unit 4120 controls the launch solenoid 654 to rotate so as to launch a plurality of game balls into the game area per unit time.

  Any one of the plurality of game balls launched into the game area flows down while rolling by a plurality of obstacle nails provided in advance in the game area, and the first start port 2101 or the second It is received in the two start ports 2102. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, the first start port sensor 3524 or the second start port sensor 2166 detects that the game ball has been received, and this detection signal is used as the main signal. Output to the control board 4100.

  When the main control board 4100 receives a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3524 or the second start port sensor 2166, the main control board 4100 acquires any one random number from a plurality of random numbers stored in advance in the ROM 4100d and the like. An internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not the random number matches one random number indicating a big hit stored in advance in the ROM 4100d or the like. The main control board 4100 converts the result of the internal lottery (the result of winning the jackpot) into a variation pattern command when the acquired random number matches one random number indicating the jackpot, and the converted variation pattern The command is output to the peripheral control board 4010.

  As described above, the internal lottery includes an internal lottery for lottering whether or not to win a jackpot, and an internal lottery for lottery of a jackpot symbol when winning a jackpot. In the internal lottery that draws the jackpot symbol, for example, the jackpot symbol that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state, the jackpot symbol with almost no payout of the game ball, or the winning jackpot A lottery such as a latent probability variation pattern is performed in which a big hit game is performed without notifying that, and the game state after the big hit game is shifted from the low probability game state to the high probability game state. When the main control board 4100 wins, for example, the latent probability variable symbol in the internal lottery for lottery of the jackpot symbol, the winning result is also converted into a variation pattern command, and the converted variation pattern command is output to the peripheral control substrate 4010.

  Then, the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100 (HPC = REC?) (SP111).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP111, it determines whether or not the big hit is won and the latent probability variation symbol is won based on the received variation pattern command ( SPKH?) (SP112).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, after performing other effects (for example, effects using the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the movable decorative body 3302), the peripheral control board 4010 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100. Wait for reception.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP112, it draws the attention of the player and brings a gaze image that brings the player's viewpoint into one place on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Displayed on a panel (hereinafter referred to as the first panel LCD1) (CE = No.1Disp) (SP113).
Here, the process in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image on the first panel LCD 1 is as follows.

  In other words, the peripheral control unit 4140 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100, and the received variation pattern command draws the player's attention using the liquid crystal display device 1900 to determine the player's viewpoint. In the case of instructing an effect of displaying a watched video to be collected at a place, a control signal is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  When the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140 is input, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 generates images for the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 under the control of the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts sprite data necessary for presentation here from the sprite data stored in advance in the character ROM 4150d, and temporarily stores the extracted sprite data in the character RAM 4150e. Next, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs the sprite data temporarily stored in the character RAM 4150e to the VDP 4150c. The VDP 4150c generates image data for two panels of the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 based on the input sprite data, and outputs the generated image data for the two panels to the image division module 4150f. To do.

  The image division module 4150f sorts the image data for the first panel LCD1 and the image data for the second panel LCD2 based on the input image data for the two sheets, and outputs the image data for the first panel LCD1. The image data is output to the first transmitter LVDS4150h, and the image data for the second panel LCD2 is output to the second transmitter LVDS4150i.

  The first transmitter LVDS 4150h converts the input image data into the LVDS format, and outputs the converted image data to the first panel LCD 1 via the scaler 4150j which is a resolution adjustment device. The first panel LCD 1 displays the input image data as image data for one line in the main scanning direction. In addition, the first panel LCD 1 displays the image data for one line in the main scanning direction, then shifts the display line in the sub scanning direction, and again in the main scanning direction after the transition, the new one line worth. Repeat the process of displaying image data.

  Through the above processing, the first panel LCD 1 can display an image necessary for the effect here based on the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 forms the intermediate layer panel M1 between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 using the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, and pays attention to the intermediate layer panel M1. A video is displayed (CE = MDisp) (SP114).

  The process in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image on the second panel LCD 2 is as described above. That is, when the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140 is input, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 generates images for the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 by the VDP 4150c, and for the first panel LCD by the image division module 4150f. The image data and the image data for the second panel LCD are sorted and output to the second transmitter LVDS4150i, and the image data input by the second transmitter LVDS4150i is converted to the LVDS format and converted. The obtained image data is output to the second panel LCD 2. The second panel LCD 2 displays the input image data as image data for one line in the main scanning direction. The second panel LCD 2 displays the image data for one line in the main scanning direction, then shifts the display line in the sub-scanning direction, and again in the main scanning direction after the transition, a new line for one line. Repeat the process of displaying image data.

  In the case where the peripheral control unit 4140 displays the gaze image displayed on the first panel LCD1 in a stepwise transition from the first panel LCD1 to the second panel LCD2, for example, the gaze image displayed on the first panel LCD1. Is gradually reduced from 100% to 90%, 80%,... 10%, while the display ratio of the watched image displayed on the second panel LCD 2 is reduced from 0% to 10%, 20%. %, Increase in stages like 100%. In this way, by gradually changing the size of the display rate of the watched video from the first panel LCD1 to the second panel LCD2, the player's viewpoint can be gradually changed from the front to the back. Further, for example, 60% of the stereoscopic video is displayed on the first panel LCD1, 30% of the stereoscopic video is displayed on the second panel LCD2, and the remaining 10% is not intentionally displayed. A pseudo intermediate layer panel can be formed between the second panel LCD 2 and the second panel LCD 2. And by forming this intermediate | middle layer panel, a player's viewpoint can be moved to a back direction gradually, and a viewing angle and a visual field range can be narrowed unconsciously.

  Through the above processing, the first panel LCD 1 and the second panel LCD 2 can display a gaze image necessary for the production here based on the control signal from the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 displays a gaze image on the second panel LCD 2 (CE = No. 2 Disp) (SP115).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 gradually moves the player's viewpoint in the order of the first panel LCD1, the intermediate layer panel M1, and the second panel LCD2, and attracts the player's attention to the innermost second panel LCD2. Thereafter, the character placed at the position closest to the player is moved (MoveObj), and the profit disparity correction process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 4010 displays the watch image on the first panel LCD 1 when winning the latent probability change, and then uses the first panel LCD 1 and the second panel LCD 2. The gaze image is displayed on the formed intermediate layer panel M1, then the gaze image is displayed on the second panel LCD2, and the player's viewpoint is gradually moved from the first panel LCD1 on the near side to the second panel LCD2 on the back side. At the same time, it is possible to move the movable decorative body 3302 disposed in front of the player, by gazing at one portion of the second panel LCD 2 on the back side. In this way, by concentrating the player's viewpoint (consciousness) at a distant position, and instantaneously moving the viewpoint (consciousness) to the movable decorative body 3302 at a nearby position, Can be surprised. In addition, by surprise the player in this way, it is possible to overlook the big win that is not announced at the time of latent probability change. By overlooking the latent probability change, it is possible to correct even a little the profit gap between a player who has a sufficient understanding level of game content and a player whose level of understanding of game content is insufficient.

[Game start and double LCD]
FIG. 248 shows a processing procedure of game start processing. When the peripheral control board 4010 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 executes the game start time process shown in FIG. 248 based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

  First, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100 (HPC = REC?) (SP121).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control board 4010 waits until it receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP121, it determines whether or not the game start time effect flag is ON (FG = ON?) (SP122).

  Note that the game start time effect flag is set to ON or OFF in advance by the peripheral control board 4010 before the game start time process is executed. That is, when one game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, or when one game ball passes the gate 2107, the peripheral control board 4010 uses a timer or the like provided therein in advance. Start counting time. Then, the peripheral control board 4010 determines in advance the time counted until another game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 or until another game ball passes through the gate 2107. When the specified time is reached, the game start time effect flag is set to ON.

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP122, it returns to step SP121 and waits until it receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 again.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP122, it executes a button press effect instructing the player to press the button a plurality of times at irregular timings for a certain period (IKFFBP = START). (SP123).

  Note that the button press effects that instruct the player to press the button a plurality of times at irregular timings for a certain period include, for example, the button press effects in the scorpion mode described above (FIGS. 220 to 225).

  In the case of the button press effect in the scorpion mode, the scorpion pattern is directed from the rear panel (second panel LCD2) of the dual liquid crystal toward the front panel (first panel LCD1). Is displayed in a physical and visual transition. Then, in the end, an image is displayed that makes it seem that the scorpion pattern will come out of the first panel LCD 1 and jump to the player as it is.

  Specifically, an intermediate layer is formed between the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2 by the first panel LCD1 and the second panel LCD2, and the second panel LCD2, the intermediate layer, and the first panel LCD1 in this order. An image is displayed in which the scorpion design transitions smoothly. An image that makes the player think that the scorpion symbol has slipped out of the first panel LCD 1 and jumped to the player as it is is displayed by the image in which the scorpion symbol smoothly transitions.

  In the case of the button pressing effect in the scorpion mode, when the button is pressed in accordance with the timing when the scorpion symbol jumps on the player, such an effect that the scorpion can be repelled is performed.

  Since the player repels the scorpion that seems to attack, the player concentrates on the timing when the scorpion comes and the timing when the button is pressed. Then, the player forgets to pay attention to the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 by being absorbed in the production.

  Note that, here, the button effect in the scorpion mode will be described as an example, but the effect performed in step SP123 is not necessarily limited to this, and when the player's attention is diverted from the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 At the same time, it may be an effect that draws the player's attention to the display screen (attention target change effect).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the prescribed number of games has been consumed in the button press effect (KG = END?) (SP124).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it returns to step SP123 and continues to execute the button press effect.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP124, the peripheral control board 4010 ends the button press effect, sets the game start time effect flag to OFF, and ends the game start time process.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 4010 can divert the player's attention from the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 during the period of determining the excellent platform at the start of the game. At the same time, the player's attention can be drawn to the display screen and engrossed. Then, the peripheral control board 4010 diverts the player's attention during the determination period from the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 and concentrates it on the performance, so that the game in the determination period is simply a game for determination. Rather than letting the player digest it, the player can enjoy the game. Therefore, a player can enjoy the game truly even at the start of the game by suppressing excessive act of determining the excellent platform at the start of the game and concentrating on the production unconsciously.

[Development requirements and double LCD]
FIG. 249 shows the processing procedure of the development request achievement processing. The peripheral control board 4010 executes this development request achievement processing periodically (for example, every 16 ms). As a premise of this development request achievement process, the peripheral control board 4010 pre-counts two types of time and one type of probability value, and stores and holds the counted time and probability value.

  Specifically, first, as a premise of this processing, the peripheral control board 4010 starts counting time when receiving a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100, and stores and holds the count time (first count value). The peripheral control board 4010 starts counting time when receiving the reach effect variation pattern command, and stores and holds the count time (second count value). The peripheral control board 4010 counts the number of jackpots cumulatively when the jackpot variation pattern command is received, calculates the ratio of the number of jackpot cumulative times (actual jackpot probability) in the cumulative number of variations of the decorative symbol, Store and hold (third count value).

  The first to third count values are counted by a timer, a counter, or the like that is provided in advance in the peripheral control board 4010. The counted value is stored and held by the peripheral control RAM 4140e.

  Then, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the first count value that has started counting after receiving the variation pattern command has reached a predetermined first specified time (for example, 10 seconds). (HPC-Count-Time = First-Value?) (SP131).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, the gaming machine has not entered the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 for a certain period of time, and is not in a formally spinning game. And the process proceeds to step SP133.

  In contrast, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP131, the peripheral control board 4010 determines that the gaming machine is at least a formally turning gaming machine, and proceeds to step SP132.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the second count value that has started counting after receiving the reach effect variation pattern command has reached a predetermined second predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes). (Reach-Count-Time = Second-Value?) (SP132).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, the gaming machine is determined to be a gaming machine that is substantially rotating at least so-called hot effects such as reach effects are regularly performed, The process proceeds to step SP131.

  It is to be noted that the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the gaming machine is substantially rotating because a so-called hot effect is regularly performed based on the count value after receiving the change pattern command of the reach effect. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in addition to the reach production, if the performance that increases the expectation of jackpot for the player is higher than usual, it is determined that the gaming machine is substantially spinning. To do. An effect that increases the expectation of a big hit for a player when an effect directly connected to the hit, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 receives a variation pattern command of a step-up notice or a blackout notice in addition to the reach effect is performed. It is determined that the gaming machine is substantially spinning. However, even if the peripheral control board 4010 performs a step-up notice or a blackout notice, which is an effect different from the effect in which the decorative symbols are simply displayed in a variable manner, the expectation of the big hit is higher than usual due to the effect. If there is nothing (for example, in the case of a step-up notice from step 1 to step 5 in the case of a notice effect only in step 1), the player will not be able to increase the expectation of jackpot from the normal level. I do not judge it. In other words, even if all of the step-up advance notices are produced here, the expectation will not be higher than usual if it is simply a notice of reach confirmation. It is not included in the hot production as used in this application. Similarly, the blackout notice is not included in the hot production described in the present application because the expectation for the big hit is not higher than usual if the production is simply for reaching the reach.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP132, this gaming machine is displayed in a decorative manner and is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Is determined to be a gaming machine that has not been operated for a certain period of time and has not substantially rotated, and the process proceeds to step SP133.

  Next, in the peripheral control board 4010, the third count value reaches a predetermined third predetermined value (for example, 1/900, which is 1/3 times that when the design hit probability is 1/300). (BB-Count = Third-Value?) (SP133).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains an affirmative result in this determination, the game machine has a certain number of big hits, although it has not been formally or substantially rotated, and a game that gives the player a sense of expectation. And the process proceeds to step SP131.

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP133, the gaming machine has not been rotated formally or substantially, and the number of jackpots has not reached a certain number. It is determined that the gaming machine has no feeling at all, and the development request achievement flag is set to ON (Flag = ON) (SP134).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 2107 or whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 (Internal Lottery?) ( SP135).

  When the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it waits until the game ball passes through the gate 2107 or until the game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP135, it determines whether or not the development request achievement flag is ON (Flag = ON?) (SP136).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it proceeds to step SP131.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP136, the peripheral control board 4010 executes a development request achievement effect instructing the player to press the button a plurality of times at an irregular timing for a certain period (IKFFBP = START). ) (SP137).

  Note that the development request achievement effect instructing the player to press the button a plurality of times at irregular timings for a certain period of time includes, for example, the button press effect (FIGS. 220 to 225) in the scorpion mode described above.

  In the case of the button press effect in this scorpion mode, as described above, from the panel (second panel LCD2) disposed on the back side of the double liquid crystal toward the panel (first panel LCD1) disposed on the near side. As a result, an image in which the scorpion symbols transition smoothly and physically is displayed. Then, in the end, an image is displayed that makes it seem that the scorpion pattern will come out of the first panel LCD 1 and jump to the player as it is.

  In the case of the button pressing effect in the scorpion mode, when the button is pressed in accordance with the timing when the scorpion symbol jumps on the player, such an effect that the scorpion can be repelled is performed.

  Since the player repels the scorpion that seems to attack, the player concentrates on the timing when the scorpion comes and the timing when the button is pressed. Then, the player forgets to pay attention to whether or not the game table is turning by being absorbed in the production.

  Note that here, a description will be given using a button press effect in the scorpion mode as an example, but the effect performed in step SP137 is not necessarily limited to this, and the player's attention is diverted from the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. At the same time, it may be an effect that draws the player's attention to the display screen, and an effect that makes the player entertain (development requirement achievement effect).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4010 determines whether or not the specified number of games in the development request achievement effect has been exhausted (Game Number = END?) (SP138).

  If the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a negative result in this determination, it returns to step SP137 and continuously executes the development request achievement effect.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 4010 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP138, it ends the development request achievement effect and sets the development request achievement flag to OFF (Flag = OFF) (SP139). End the development request achievement process.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 4010 can determine whether or not the gaming machine installed in the hall is a table that does not rotate formally or substantially. It may be determined that only a table that does not rotate formally. When the peripheral control board 4010 determines that the gaming machine is installed in the hall as such a defective table, it distracts the player from the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 and at the same time, the player Can be enjoyed without moving the table, even if the game table is a bad table. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to satisfy the development request to entertain the player while stably securing the profit of the hall.

  Although the present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments as described above, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. Design changes are possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the case where the gaming machine is applied to a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachinko machine. The same operational effects can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
1100 Game area 1200 Game panel (game board)
1200e Opening 1900 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
2401 Base frame member (center frame)
2413 Upper right decorative unit (decorative member)
2420 Logo front decoration (specific character part)
2421 Light diffusion sheet 2432 Logo lens (decorative character part)
3100 Upper character unit (movable decoration)
3110 Base member 3110d Support cylinder part (support part)
3113a Light reflecting surface 3120 Large side light emitting rotating part (decorating part)
3121 Small side light emission rotation part (decoration part)
3122 Large-side cover member (cover member)
3123 Small side cover member (cover member)
3126 Large driving means (driving means)
3130 Small drive means (drive means)
3135 Central light-emitting substrate (light-emitting part)
3139 Reflector 3142 Light-emitting substrate (light-emitting unit)
3143 Lens (support)
3145 Reflector 3162 Rotating body decoration (decoration part)
3168 lens (support)
3170 Reflector 3171 Light emitting substrate (light emitting part)
3172 Cover member 3175 Driving means 3180a Light reflecting surface 3180b Light reflecting surface 3400 Logo display unit (character decoration)
3400a First character part (character part)
3400b Second character part (character part)
3400c Third character part (character part)
3400d Fourth character part (character part)
3400e Fifth character part (character part)
3400f Sixth character part (character part)
3400w Overlapping part 3401 Logo decoration part (character decoration part)
3403 Light diffusion sheet 3405 Left side light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
3406 Right side light emitting substrate (light emitting means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

A game area formed on the front of the game board is provided with a start port and obstacle nails, and when a game ball as a game medium wins at the start port, a big win lottery will be performed based on that and the lottery result will be a big win A gaming machine that generates a gaming state advantageous to a player is known.

In this type of gaming machine, as shown in Patent Document 1, a center role is incorporated in the approximate center of the game board, and a display screen of the effect display device is visually recognized through an opening window in the center role. Yes. Then, by displaying various effect images on the effect display device in accordance with the game state and the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the player has a sense of expectation for the lottery and the interest of the player is enhanced.

The center combination is inserted into the opening formed in the center of the game board from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the game board. That is, the center accessory is formed with an annular insertion portion that is inserted into the opening portion of the game board, and a thin plate-like flange portion that protrudes radially outward from the insertion portion and is fixed to the front surface of the game board. Yes. In addition, a partition wall that divides the inner space of the center object from the game area is provided on the player side so that the game ball that rolls in the game area does not enter the center object. Protrusively formed.
In addition, one or more decorative bodies are provided on the inner edge of the opening window of the center accessory, thereby enhancing the decoration effect of the center accessory and impressing the concept of the gaming machine.
In addition, since this decoration body is generally arrange | positioned inside the partition wall part, it becomes possible to provide a large-sized decoration body, so that the magnitude | size of a partition wall part is large. In other words, in order to make the decorative body appear large, it is necessary to make the size in the radial direction of the partition wall, that is, the size of the opening window relatively large.

JP-A-2005-13703

However, if the center role is enlarged in order to enlarge the opening of the center role, the area of the game area where the game ball rolls is relatively narrow, and the behavior of the game ball becomes monotonous. There is a risk that it may be difficult to secure a space for allowing the game ball to pass therethrough.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of making a large opening window of a center accessory without narrowing a game area.

Means 1: “ A game board having a game area on the front surface and having an opening formed in the game area;
A center accessory inserted into the opening of the game board,
The center role is
An insertion portion inserted into the opening of the game board;
A partition wall portion that protrudes toward the player side from the front surface of the game board, and divides the game area and the internal space of the center object;
A flange portion that protrudes radially outward from the insertion portion and contacts the front surface of the game board;
A gaming area expanded between the flange portion and the partition wall portion by disposing at least a part of the partition wall portion at a predetermined position radially inward of the inner edge of the opening in a front view. A game area expansion portion to be formed,
A plurality of the game area expansion portions forming a game area expanded between the flange portion and the partition wall portion;
The plurality of game area expansion units include a game area expansion unit having a light transmission part,
One game area expansion section of the plurality of game area expansion sections is provided in the right flow area where the game ball flows down when the launch strength of the game ball becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined strength.
It is characterized by that.

As described above, according to the present invention, the opening window of the center accessory can be made large without narrowing the game area.

Claims (1)

A game ball is launched into a game area including a plurality of obstacle nails, a gate, a start opening, a big prize opening, and a display screen, and the fired game ball collides with the plurality of obstacle nails to roll and When a game ball passes through the gate in the process of flowing down or when a game ball enters the start port, an internal lottery of a normal symbol or an internal lottery of a special symbol is performed, and an internal lottery of the normal symbol or the In the case where an internal lottery of special symbols is performed, in the gaming machine that performs the display while varying the decorative symbols using the display screen,
As a result of the internal symbol lottery, if the winning symbol is won, the movable piece of the ordinary electric accessory provided in advance in the game area is opened and closed so that the game ball can easily enter the start opening. Support game execution means for executing a game to be played, and
As a result of the internal lottery of the special symbol, when the big win symbol is won, the opening and closing member of the special electric accessory provided in advance in the game area is opened and closed so that the game ball enters the big winning opening. A jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game to facilitate,
A game start determination means for determining whether or not the game in the gaming machine is a game at the start of a game within a certain period after the game is started;
If it is determined by the game start time determination means that the game in the gaming machine is a game at the start of the game, the player's attention is diverted from the start port using the display screen and at the same time the player's attention A game machine comprising: an attention target changing effect executing means for executing an effect of attracting the player to the display screen.

Images